diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
223 files changed, 2658 insertions, 939 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX index f607367e642f..1b777b960492 100644 --- a/Documentation/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX @@ -206,8 +206,8 @@ laptops/ - directory with laptop related info and laptop driver documentation. ldm.txt - a brief description of LDM (Windows Dynamic Disks). -leds-class.txt - - documents LED handling under Linux. +leds/ + - directory with info about LED handling under Linux. local_ops.txt - semantics and behavior of local atomic operations. lockdep-design.txt @@ -328,8 +328,6 @@ sysrq.txt - info on the magic SysRq key. telephony/ - directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support. -uml/ - - directory with information about User Mode Linux. unicode.txt - info on the Unicode character/font mapping used in Linux. unshare.txt diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..06b62badddd1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-bcma @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../manuf +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Contact: Rafał Miłecki <zajec5@gmail.com> +Description: + Each BCMA core has it's manufacturer id. See + include/linux/bcma/bcma.h for possible values. + +What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../id +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Contact: Rafał Miłecki <zajec5@gmail.com> +Description: + There are a few types of BCMA cores, they can be identified by + id field. + +What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../rev +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Contact: Rafał Miłecki <zajec5@gmail.com> +Description: + BCMA cores of the same type can still slightly differ depending + on their revision. Use it for detailed programming. + +What: /sys/bus/bcma/devices/.../class +Date: May 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.40 +Contact: Rafał Miłecki <zajec5@gmail.com> +Description: + Each BCMA core is identified by few fields, including class it + belongs to. See include/linux/bcma/bcma.h for possible values. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-css b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-css index b585ec258a08..2979c40c10e9 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-css +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-css @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ Contact: Cornelia Huck <cornelia.huck@de.ibm.com> linux-s390@vger.kernel.org Description: Contains the PIM/PAM/POM values, as reported by the channel subsystem when last queried by the common I/O - layer (this implies that this attribute is not neccessarily + layer (this implies that this attribute is not necessarily in sync with the values current in the channel subsystem). Note: This is an I/O-subchannel specific attribute. Users: s390-tools, HAL diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-cciss b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-cciss index 4f29e5f1ebfa..f5bb0a3bb8c0 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-cciss +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-pci-devices-cciss @@ -59,3 +59,15 @@ Kernel Version: 2.6.31 Contact: iss_storagedev@hp.com Description: Displays the usage count (number of opens) of logical drive Y of controller X. + +Where: /sys/bus/pci/devices/<dev>/ccissX/resettable +Date: February 2011 +Kernel Version: 2.6.38 +Contact: iss_storagedev@hp.com +Description: Value of 1 indicates the controller can honor the reset_devices + kernel parameter. Value of 0 indicates reset_devices cannot be + honored. This is to allow, for example, kexec tools to be able + to warn the user if they designate an unresettable device as + a dump device, as kdump requires resetting the device in order + to work reliably. + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led index edff6630c805..3646ec85d513 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led @@ -33,5 +33,5 @@ Contact: Richard Purdie <rpurdie@rpsys.net> Description: Invert the LED on/off state. This parameter is specific to gpio and backlight triggers. In case of the backlight trigger, - it is usefull when driving a LED which is intended to indicate + it is useful when driving a LED which is intended to indicate a device in a standby like state. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu index 7564e88bfa43..e7be75b96e4b 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu @@ -183,21 +183,21 @@ Description: Discover and change clock speed of CPUs to learn how to control the knobs. -What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu*/cache/index*/cache_disable_X -Date: August 2008 +What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu*/cache/index3/cache_disable_{0,1} +Date: August 2008 KernelVersion: 2.6.27 -Contact: mark.langsdorf@amd.com -Description: These files exist in every cpu's cache index directories. - There are currently 2 cache_disable_# files in each - directory. Reading from these files on a supported - processor will return that cache disable index value - for that processor and node. Writing to one of these - files will cause the specificed cache index to be disabled. - - Currently, only AMD Family 10h Processors support cache index - disable, and only for their L3 caches. See the BIOS and - Kernel Developer's Guide at - http://support.amd.com/us/Embedded_TechDocs/31116-Public-GH-BKDG_3-28_5-28-09.pdf - for formatting information and other details on the - cache index disable. -Users: joachim.deguara@amd.com +Contact: discuss@x86-64.org +Description: Disable L3 cache indices + + These files exist in every CPU's cache/index3 directory. Each + cache_disable_{0,1} file corresponds to one disable slot which + can be used to disable a cache index. Reading from these files + on a processor with this functionality will return the currently + disabled index for that node. There is one L3 structure per + node, or per internal node on MCM machines. Writing a valid + index to one of these files will cause the specificed cache + index to be disabled. + + All AMD processors with L3 caches provide this functionality. + For details, see BKDGs at + http://developer.amd.com/documentation/guides/Pages/default.aspx diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone index b4c4f158ab9c..3ca3971109bf 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kone @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ What: /sys/bus/usb/devices/<busnum>-<devnum>:<config num>.<interface num>/<hid- Date: March 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the - press of a button. A profile holds informations like button + press of a button. A profile holds information like button mappings, sensitivity, the colors of the 5 leds and light effects. When read, these files return the respective profile. The diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus index 00efced73969..326e05452da7 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-koneplus @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + profile_buttons holds information about button layout. When written, this file lets one write the respective profile buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 77 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid data. @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + profile_buttons holds information about button layout. When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. The returned data is 77 bytes in size. This file is readonly. @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Date: October 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity and light effects. When written, this file lets one write the respective profile settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 43 bytes long. @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity and light effects. When read, these files return the respective profile settings. The returned data is 43 bytes in size. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus index fdfa16f8189b..20f937c9d84f 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-kovaplus @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ Date: January 2011 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + profile_buttons holds information about button layout. When written, this file lets one write the respective profile buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 23 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid data. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Date: January 2011 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + profile_buttons holds information about button layout. When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. The returned data is 23 bytes in size. This file is readonly. @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Date: January 2011 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity and light effects. When written, this file lets one write the respective profile settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 16 bytes long. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ Date: January 2011 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity and light effects. When read, these files return the respective profile settings. The returned data is 16 bytes in size. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra index 5fab71af3c46..3f8de50e4ff1 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-hid-roccat-pyra @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity and light effects. When written, this file lets one write the respective profile settings back to the mouse. The data has to be 13 bytes long. @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_settings holds informations like resolution, sensitivity + profile_settings holds information like resolution, sensitivity and light effects. When read, these files return the respective profile settings. The returned data is 13 bytes in size. @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + profile_buttons holds information about button layout. When written, this file lets one write the respective profile buttons back to the mouse. The data has to be 19 bytes long. The mouse will reject invalid data. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Date: August 2010 Contact: Stefan Achatz <erazor_de@users.sourceforge.net> Description: The mouse can store 5 profiles which can be switched by the press of a button. A profile is split in settings and buttons. - profile_buttons holds informations about button layout. + profile_buttons holds information about button layout. When read, these files return the respective profile buttons. The returned data is 19 bytes in size. This file is readonly. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-samsung-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-samsung-laptop new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0a810231aad4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-driver-samsung-laptop @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +What: /sys/devices/platform/samsung/performance_level +Date: January 1, 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.33 +Contact: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de> +Description: Some Samsung laptops have different "performance levels" + that are can be modified by a function key, and by this + sysfs file. These values don't always make a whole lot + of sense, but some users like to modify them to keep + their fans quiet at all costs. Reading from this file + will show the current performance level. Writing to the + file can change this value. + Valid options: + "silent" + "normal" + "overclock" + Note that not all laptops support all of these options. + Specifically, not all support the "overclock" option, + and it's still unknown if this value even changes + anything, other than making the user feel a bit better. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi index ba9da9503c23..c78f9ab01e56 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-dmi @@ -14,14 +14,15 @@ Description: DMI is structured as a large table of entries, where each entry has a common header indicating the type and - length of the entry, as well as 'handle' that is - supposed to be unique amongst all entries. + length of the entry, as well as a firmware-provided + 'handle' that is supposed to be unique amongst all + entries. Some entries are required by the specification, but many others are optional. In general though, users should never expect to find a specific entry type on their system unless they know for certain what their firmware - is doing. Machine to machine will vary. + is doing. Machine to machine experiences will vary. Multiple entries of the same type are allowed. In order to handle these duplicate entry types, each entry is @@ -67,25 +68,24 @@ Description: and the two terminating nul characters. type : The type of the entry. This value is the same as found in the directory name. It indicates - how the rest of the entry should be - interpreted. + how the rest of the entry should be interpreted. instance: The instance ordinal of the entry for the given type. This value is the same as found in the parent directory name. - position: The position of the entry within the entirety - of the entirety. + position: The ordinal position (zero-based) of the entry + within the entirety of the DMI entry table. === Entry Specialization === Some entry types may have other information available in - sysfs. + sysfs. Not all types are specialized. --- Type 15 - System Event Log --- This entry allows the firmware to export a log of events the system has taken. This information is typically backed by nvram, but the implementation - details are abstracted by this table. This entries data + details are abstracted by this table. This entry's data is exported in the directory: /sys/firmware/dmi/entries/15-0/system_event_log diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-gsmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-gsmi new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0faa0aaf4b6a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-gsmi @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/gsmi +Date: March 2011 +Contact: Mike Waychison <mikew@google.com> +Description: + Some servers used internally at Google have firmware + that provides callback functionality via explicit SMI + triggers. Some of the callbacks are similar to those + provided by the EFI runtime services page, but due to + historical reasons this different entry-point has been + used. + + The gsmi driver implements the kernel's abstraction for + these firmware callbacks. Currently, this functionality + is limited to handling the system event log and getting + access to EFI-style variables stored in nvram. + + Layout: + + /sys/firmware/gsmi/vars: + + This directory has the same layout (and + underlying implementation as /sys/firmware/efi/vars. + See Documentation/ABI/*/sysfs-firmware-efi-vars + for more information on how to interact with + this structure. + + /sys/firmware/gsmi/append_to_eventlog - write-only: + + This file takes a binary blob and passes it onto + the firmware to be timestamped and appended to + the system eventlog. The binary format is + interpreted by the firmware and may change from + platform to platform. The only kernel-enforced + requirement is that the blob be prefixed with a + 32bit host-endian type used as part of the + firmware call. + + /sys/firmware/gsmi/clear_config - write-only: + + Writing any value to this file will cause the + entire firmware configuration to be reset to + "factory defaults". Callers should assume that + a reboot is required for the configuration to be + cleared. + + /sys/firmware/gsmi/clear_eventlog - write-only: + + This file is used to clear out a portion/the + whole of the system event log. Values written + should be values between 1 and 100 inclusive (in + ASCII) representing the fraction of the log to + clear. Not all platforms support fractional + clearing though, and this writes to this file + will error out if the firmware doesn't like your + submitted fraction. + + Callers should assume that a reboot is needed + for this operation to complete. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-log b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-log new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9b58e7c5365f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-firmware-log @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +What: /sys/firmware/log +Date: February 2011 +Contact: Mike Waychison <mikew@google.com> +Description: + The /sys/firmware/log is a binary file that represents a + read-only copy of the firmware's log if one is + available. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-fscaps b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-fscaps new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..50a3033b5e15 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-fscaps @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +What: /sys/kernel/fscaps +Date: February 2011 +KernelVersion: 2.6.38 +Contact: Ludwig Nussel <ludwig.nussel@suse.de> +Description + Shows whether file system capabilities are honored + when executing a binary + diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop index 41ff8ae4dee0..cd9d667c3da2 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ KernelVersion: 2.6.20 Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> Description: Some models like the W1N have a LED display that can be - used to display several informations. + used to display several items of information. To control the LED display, use the following : echo 0x0T000DDD > /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/ where T control the 3 letters display, and DDD the 3 digits display. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-wmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-wmi new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2e7df91620de --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-wmi @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +What: /sys/devices/platform/<platform>/cpufv +Date: Oct 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.37 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Change CPU clock configuration (write-only). + There are three available clock configuration: + * 0 -> Super Performance Mode + * 1 -> High Performance Mode + * 2 -> Power Saving Mode + +What: /sys/devices/platform/<platform>/camera +Date: Jan 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.39 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Control the camera. 1 means on, 0 means off. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/<platform>/cardr +Date: Jan 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.39 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Control the card reader. 1 means on, 0 means off. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/<platform>/touchpad +Date: Jan 2010 +KernelVersion: 2.6.39 +Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> +Description: + Control the card touchpad. 1 means on, 0 means off. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-wmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-wmi deleted file mode 100644 index e4b5fef5fadd..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-eeepc-wmi +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -What: /sys/devices/platform/eeepc-wmi/cpufv -Date: Oct 2010 -KernelVersion: 2.6.37 -Contact: "Corentin Chary" <corentincj@iksaif.net> -Description: - Change CPU clock configuration (write-only). - There are three available clock configuration: - * 0 -> Super Performance Mode - * 1 -> High Performance Mode - * 2 -> Power Saving Mode diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power index 194ca446ac28..b464d12761ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power @@ -158,3 +158,17 @@ Description: successful, will make the kernel abort a subsequent transition to a sleep state if any wakeup events are reported after the write has returned. + +What: /sys/power/reserved_size +Date: May 2011 +Contact: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> +Description: + The /sys/power/reserved_size file allows user space to control + the amount of memory reserved for allocations made by device + drivers during the "device freeze" stage of hibernation. It can + be written a string representing a non-negative integer that + will be used as the amount of memory to reserve for allocations + made by device drivers' "freeze" callbacks, in bytes. + + Reading from this file will display the current value, which is + set to 1 MB by default. diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile index 2deb069aedf1..8436b018c289 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/Makefile @@ -55,7 +55,6 @@ mandocs: $(MAN) build_images = mkdir -p $(objtree)/Documentation/DocBook/media/ && \ cp $(srctree)/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/*.png \ $(srctree)/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/*.gif \ - $(srctree)/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/*.png \ $(objtree)/Documentation/DocBook/media/ xmldoclinks: diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl index 36f63d4a0a06..b638e50cf8f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/device-drivers.tmpl @@ -96,10 +96,10 @@ X!Iinclude/linux/kobject.h <chapter id="devdrivers"> <title>Device drivers infrastructure</title> + <sect1><title>The Basic Device Driver-Model Structures </title> +!Iinclude/linux/device.h + </sect1> <sect1><title>Device Drivers Base</title> -<!-- -X!Iinclude/linux/device.h ---> !Edrivers/base/driver.c !Edrivers/base/core.c !Edrivers/base/class.c diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbproperty.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbproperty.xml index 5f57c7ccd4ba..97f397e2fb3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbproperty.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/dvbproperty.xml @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ <para>Central frequency of the channel.</para> - <para>For ISDB-T the channels are usally transmitted with an offset of 143kHz. E.g. a + <para>For ISDB-T the channels are usually transmitted with an offset of 143kHz. E.g. a valid frequncy could be 474143 kHz. The stepping is bound to the bandwidth of the channel which is 6MHz.</para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/frontend.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/frontend.xml index 78d756de5906..60c6976fb311 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/frontend.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/dvb/frontend.xml @@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ consistently to the DiSEqC commands as described in the DiSEqC spec.</para> <section id="frontend_sec_tone"> <title>SEC continuous tone</title> -<para>The continous 22KHz tone is usually used with non-DiSEqC capable LNBs to switch the +<para>The continuous 22KHz tone is usually used with non-DiSEqC capable LNBs to switch the high/low band of a dual-band LNB. When using DiSEqC epuipment this voltage has to be switched consistently to the DiSEqC commands as described in the DiSEqC spec.</para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl index fb10fd08c05c..b3422341d65c 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/genericirq.tmpl @@ -191,8 +191,8 @@ <para> Whenever an interrupt triggers, the lowlevel arch code calls into the generic interrupt code by calling desc->handle_irq(). - This highlevel IRQ handling function only uses desc->chip primitives - referenced by the assigned chip descriptor structure. + This highlevel IRQ handling function only uses desc->irq_data.chip + primitives referenced by the assigned chip descriptor structure. </para> </sect1> <sect1 id="Highlevel_Driver_API"> @@ -206,11 +206,11 @@ <listitem><para>enable_irq()</para></listitem> <listitem><para>disable_irq_nosync() (SMP only)</para></listitem> <listitem><para>synchronize_irq() (SMP only)</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>set_irq_type()</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>set_irq_wake()</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>set_irq_data()</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>set_irq_chip()</para></listitem> - <listitem><para>set_irq_chip_data()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_set_irq_type()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_set_irq_wake()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_set_handler_data()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_set_chip()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_set_chip_data()</para></listitem> </itemizedlist> See the autogenerated function documentation for details. </para> @@ -225,6 +225,8 @@ <listitem><para>handle_fasteoi_irq</para></listitem> <listitem><para>handle_simple_irq</para></listitem> <listitem><para>handle_percpu_irq</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>handle_edge_eoi_irq</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>handle_bad_irq</para></listitem> </itemizedlist> The interrupt flow handlers (either predefined or architecture specific) are assigned to specific interrupts by the architecture @@ -241,13 +243,13 @@ <programlisting> default_enable(struct irq_data *data) { - desc->chip->irq_unmask(data); + desc->irq_data.chip->irq_unmask(data); } default_disable(struct irq_data *data) { if (!delay_disable(data)) - desc->chip->irq_mask(data); + desc->irq_data.chip->irq_mask(data); } default_ack(struct irq_data *data) @@ -284,9 +286,9 @@ noop(struct irq_data *data)) <para> The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> -desc->chip->irq_mask(); -handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); -desc->chip->irq_unmask(); +desc->irq_data.chip->irq_mask_ack(); +handle_irq_event(desc->action); +desc->irq_data.chip->irq_unmask(); </programlisting> </para> </sect3> @@ -300,8 +302,8 @@ desc->chip->irq_unmask(); <para> The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> -handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); -desc->chip->irq_eoi(); +handle_irq_event(desc->action); +desc->irq_data.chip->irq_eoi(); </programlisting> </para> </sect3> @@ -315,17 +317,17 @@ desc->chip->irq_eoi(); The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> if (desc->status & running) { - desc->chip->irq_mask(); + desc->irq_data.chip->irq_mask_ack(); desc->status |= pending | masked; return; } -desc->chip->irq_ack(); +desc->irq_data.chip->irq_ack(); desc->status |= running; do { if (desc->status & masked) - desc->chip->irq_unmask(); + desc->irq_data.chip->irq_unmask(); desc->status &= ~pending; - handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); + handle_irq_event(desc->action); } while (status & pending); desc->status &= ~running; </programlisting> @@ -344,7 +346,7 @@ desc->status &= ~running; <para> The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> -handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); +handle_irq_event(desc->action); </programlisting> </para> </sect3> @@ -362,12 +364,29 @@ handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); <para> The following control flow is implemented (simplified excerpt): <programlisting> -handle_IRQ_event(desc->action); -if (desc->chip->irq_eoi) - desc->chip->irq_eoi(); +if (desc->irq_data.chip->irq_ack) + desc->irq_data.chip->irq_ack(); +handle_irq_event(desc->action); +if (desc->irq_data.chip->irq_eoi) + desc->irq_data.chip->irq_eoi(); </programlisting> </para> </sect3> + <sect3 id="EOI_Edge_IRQ_flow_handler"> + <title>EOI Edge IRQ flow handler</title> + <para> + handle_edge_eoi_irq provides an abnomination of the edge + handler which is solely used to tame a badly wreckaged + irq controller on powerpc/cell. + </para> + </sect3> + <sect3 id="BAD_IRQ_flow_handler"> + <title>Bad IRQ flow handler</title> + <para> + handle_bad_irq is used for spurious interrupts which + have no real handler assigned.. + </para> + </sect3> </sect2> <sect2 id="Quirks_and_optimizations"> <title>Quirks and optimizations</title> @@ -410,6 +429,7 @@ if (desc->chip->irq_eoi) <listitem><para>irq_mask_ack() - Optional, recommended for performance</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_mask()</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_unmask()</para></listitem> + <listitem><para>irq_eoi() - Optional, required for eoi flow handlers</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_retrigger() - Optional</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_set_type() - Optional</para></listitem> <listitem><para>irq_set_wake() - Optional</para></listitem> @@ -424,32 +444,24 @@ if (desc->chip->irq_eoi) <chapter id="doirq"> <title>__do_IRQ entry point</title> <para> - The original implementation __do_IRQ() is an alternative entry - point for all types of interrupts. + The original implementation __do_IRQ() was an alternative entry + point for all types of interrupts. It not longer exists. </para> <para> This handler turned out to be not suitable for all interrupt hardware and was therefore reimplemented with split - functionality for egde/level/simple/percpu interrupts. This is not + functionality for edge/level/simple/percpu interrupts. This is not only a functional optimization. It also shortens code paths for interrupts. </para> - <para> - To make use of the split implementation, replace the call to - __do_IRQ by a call to desc->handle_irq() and associate - the appropriate handler function to desc->handle_irq(). - In most cases the generic handler implementations should - be sufficient. - </para> </chapter> <chapter id="locking"> <title>Locking on SMP</title> <para> The locking of chip registers is up to the architecture that - defines the chip primitives. There is a chip->lock field that can be used - for serialization, but the generic layer does not touch it. The per-irq - structure is protected via desc->lock, by the generic layer. + defines the chip primitives. The per-irq structure is + protected via desc->lock, by the generic layer. </para> </chapter> <chapter id="structs"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl index f66f4df18690..67e7ab41c0a6 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl @@ -1763,7 +1763,7 @@ as it would be on UP. There is a furthur optimization possible here: remember our original cache code, where there were no reference counts and the caller simply held the lock whenever using the object? This is still possible: if -you hold the lock, noone can delete the object, so you don't need to +you hold the lock, no one can delete the object, so you don't need to get and put the reference count. </para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl index 8c5411cfeaf0..cdd1bb9aac0d 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/libata.tmpl @@ -1032,7 +1032,7 @@ and other resources, etc. <listitem> <para> This is indicated by ICRC bit in the ERROR register and - means that corruption occurred during data transfer. Upto + means that corruption occurred during data transfer. Up to ATA/ATAPI-7, the standard specifies that this bit is only applicable to UDMA transfers but ATA/ATAPI-8 draft revision 1f says that the bit may be applicable to multiword DMA and @@ -1045,10 +1045,10 @@ and other resources, etc. <term>ABRT error during data transfer or on completion</term> <listitem> <para> - Upto ATA/ATAPI-7, the standard specifies that ABRT could be + Up to ATA/ATAPI-7, the standard specifies that ABRT could be set on ICRC errors and on cases where a device is not able to complete a command. Combined with the fact that MWDMA - and PIO transfer errors aren't allowed to use ICRC bit upto + and PIO transfer errors aren't allowed to use ICRC bit up to ATA/ATAPI-7, it seems to imply that ABRT bit alone could indicate tranfer errors. </para> @@ -1122,7 +1122,7 @@ and other resources, etc. <para> Depending on commands, not all STATUS/ERROR bits are applicable. These non-applicable bits are marked with - "na" in the output descriptions but upto ATA/ATAPI-7 + "na" in the output descriptions but up to ATA/ATAPI-7 no definition of "na" can be found. However, ATA/ATAPI-8 draft revision 1f describes "N/A" as follows. @@ -1507,7 +1507,7 @@ and other resources, etc. <listitem> <para> - CHS set up with INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS (seldomly used) + CHS set up with INITIALIZE DEVICE PARAMETERS (seldom used) </para> </listitem> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl index 5d259c632cdf..fea63b45471a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/media-entities.tmpl @@ -294,6 +294,7 @@ <!ENTITY sub-srggb10 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb10.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-srggb8 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-srggb8.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-y10 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-y10.xml"> +<!ENTITY sub-y12 SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt-y12.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-pixfmt SYSTEM "v4l/pixfmt.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-cropcap SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-cropcap.xml"> <!ENTITY sub-dbg-g-register SYSTEM "v4l/vidioc-dbg-g-register.xml"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl index 620eb3f6a90a..6f242d5dee9a 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/mtdnand.tmpl @@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ static void board_select_chip (struct mtd_info *mtd, int chip) Reed-Solomon library. </para> <para> - The ECC bytes must be placed immidiately after the data + The ECC bytes must be placed immediately after the data bytes in order to make the syndrome generator work. This is contrary to the usual layout used by software ECC. The separation of data and out of band area is not longer @@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ static void board_select_chip (struct mtd_info *mtd, int chip) holds the bad block table. Store a pointer to the pattern in the pattern field. Further the length of the pattern has to be stored in len and the offset in the spare area must be given - in the offs member of the nand_bbt_descr stucture. For mirrored + in the offs member of the nand_bbt_descr structure. For mirrored bad block tables different patterns are mandatory.</para></listitem> <listitem><para>Table creation</para> <para>Set the option NAND_BBT_CREATE to enable the table creation @@ -648,7 +648,7 @@ static void board_select_chip (struct mtd_info *mtd, int chip) <listitem><para>Table version control</para> <para>Set the option NAND_BBT_VERSION to enable the table version control. It's highly recommended to enable this for mirrored tables with write - support. It makes sure that the risk of loosing the bad block + support. It makes sure that the risk of losing the bad block table information is reduced to the loss of the information about the one worn out block which should be marked bad. The version is stored in 4 consecutive bytes in the spare area of the device. The position of @@ -1060,19 +1060,19 @@ data in this page</entry> <row> <entry>0x3D</entry> <entry>ECC byte 21</entry> -<entry>Error correction code byte 0 of the eigth 256 Bytes of data +<entry>Error correction code byte 0 of the eighth 256 Bytes of data in this page</entry> </row> <row> <entry>0x3E</entry> <entry>ECC byte 22</entry> -<entry>Error correction code byte 1 of the eigth 256 Bytes of data +<entry>Error correction code byte 1 of the eighth 256 Bytes of data in this page</entry> </row> <row> <entry>0x3F</entry> <entry>ECC byte 23</entry> -<entry>Error correction code byte 2 of the eigth 256 Bytes of data +<entry>Error correction code byte 2 of the eighth 256 Bytes of data in this page</entry> </row> </tbody></tgroup></informaltable> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/rapidio.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/rapidio.tmpl index 54eb26b57372..50479360d845 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/rapidio.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/rapidio.tmpl @@ -133,7 +133,6 @@ !Idrivers/rapidio/rio-sysfs.c </sect1> <sect1 id="PPC32_support"><title>PPC32 support</title> -!Earch/powerpc/sysdev/fsl_rio.c !Iarch/powerpc/sysdev/fsl_rio.c </sect1> </chapter> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl index 53f4f8d3b810..346e552fa2cc 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/regulator.tmpl @@ -267,8 +267,8 @@ <sect1 id="machine-constraint"> <title>Constraints</title> <para> - As well as definining the connections the machine interface - also provides constraints definining the operations that + As well as defining the connections the machine interface + also provides constraints defining the operations that clients are allowed to perform and the parameters that may be set. This is required since generally regulator devices will offer more flexibility than it is safe to use on a given diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl index b4665b9c40b0..7c4b514d62b1 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl @@ -797,7 +797,7 @@ framework to set up sysfs files for this region. Simply leave it alone. perform some initialization. After that, your hardware starts working and will generate an interrupt as soon as it's finished, has some data available, or needs your - attention because an error occured. + attention because an error occurred. </para> <para> <filename>/dev/uioX</filename> is a read-only file. A diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/usb.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/usb.tmpl index af293606fbe3..8d57c1888dca 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/usb.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/usb.tmpl @@ -690,7 +690,7 @@ usbdev_ioctl (int fd, int ifno, unsigned request, void *param) </para><para> This request lets kernel drivers talk to user mode code through filesystem operations even when they don't create - a charactor or block special device. + a character or block special device. It's also been used to do things like ask devices what device special file should be used. Two pre-defined ioctls are used diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml index dbab79c215c1..9028721438dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/common.xml @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org, 2002-11-20. --></para> <para>By convention system administrators create various character device special files with these major and minor numbers in -the <filename>/dev</filename> directory. The names recomended for the +the <filename>/dev</filename> directory. The names recommended for the different V4L2 device types are listed in <xref linkend="devices" />. </para> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml index 2fae3e87ce73..a920ee80f640 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/controls.xml @@ -1243,7 +1243,7 @@ values are:</entry> </row><row><entry spanname="descr">Mutes the audio when capturing. This is not done by muting audio hardware, which can still produce a slight hiss, but in the encoder itself, guaranteeing a fixed -and reproducable audio bitstream. 0 = unmuted, 1 = muted.</entry> +and reproducible audio bitstream. 0 = unmuted, 1 = muted.</entry> </row> <row><entry></entry></row> <row id="v4l2-mpeg-video-encoding"> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-subdev.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-subdev.xml index 21caff6d159b..05c8fefcbcbe 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-subdev.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/dev-subdev.xml @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ processing hardware.</para> <figure id="pipeline-scaling"> - <title>Image Format Negotation on Pipelines</title> + <title>Image Format Negotiation on Pipelines</title> <mediaobject> <imageobject> <imagedata fileref="pipeline.pdf" format="PS" /> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/libv4l.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/libv4l.xml index c14fc3db2a81..3cb10ec51929 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/libv4l.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/libv4l.xml @@ -140,7 +140,7 @@ and is not locked sets the cid to the scaled value. <para>int v4l2_get_control(int fd, int cid) - This function returns a value of 0 - 65535, scaled to from the actual range of the given v4l control id. when the cid does not exist, could not be -accessed for some reason, or some error occured 0 is returned. +accessed for some reason, or some error occurred 0 is returned. </para></listitem> </itemizedlist> </section> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-ioc-setup-link.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-ioc-setup-link.xml index 2331e76ded17..cec97af4dab4 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-ioc-setup-link.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/media-ioc-setup-link.xml @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ <varlistentry> <term><parameter>request</parameter></term> <listitem> - <para>MEDIA_IOC_ENUM_LINKS</para> + <para>MEDIA_IOC_SETUP_LINK</para> </listitem> </varlistentry> <varlistentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y12.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y12.xml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ff417b858cc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt-y12.xml @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +<refentry id="V4L2-PIX-FMT-Y12"> + <refmeta> + <refentrytitle>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y12 ('Y12 ')</refentrytitle> + &manvol; + </refmeta> + <refnamediv> + <refname><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y12</constant></refname> + <refpurpose>Grey-scale image</refpurpose> + </refnamediv> + <refsect1> + <title>Description</title> + + <para>This is a grey-scale image with a depth of 12 bits per pixel. Pixels +are stored in 16-bit words with unused high bits padded with 0. The least +significant byte is stored at lower memory addresses (little-endian).</para> + + <example> + <title><constant>V4L2_PIX_FMT_Y12</constant> 4 × 4 +pixel image</title> + + <formalpara> + <title>Byte Order.</title> + <para>Each cell is one byte. + <informaltable frame="none"> + <tgroup cols="9" align="center"> + <colspec align="left" colwidth="2*" /> + <tbody valign="top"> + <row> + <entry>start + 0:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>00low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>00high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>01low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>01high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>02low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>02high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>03low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>03high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 8:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>10low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>10high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>11low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>11high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>12low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>12high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>13low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>13high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 16:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>20low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>20high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>21low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>21high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>22low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>22high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>23low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>23high</subscript></entry> + </row> + <row> + <entry>start + 24:</entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>30low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>30high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>31low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>31high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>32low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>32high</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>33low</subscript></entry> + <entry>Y'<subscript>33high</subscript></entry> + </row> + </tbody> + </tgroup> + </informaltable> + </para> + </formalpara> + </example> + </refsect1> +</refentry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml index c6fdcbbd1b41..40af4beb48b9 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/pixfmt.xml @@ -696,6 +696,7 @@ information.</para> &sub-packed-yuv; &sub-grey; &sub-y10; + &sub-y12; &sub-y16; &sub-yuyv; &sub-uyvy; diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/remote_controllers.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/remote_controllers.xml index 3c3b667b28e7..160e464d44b7 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/remote_controllers.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/remote_controllers.xml @@ -133,7 +133,7 @@ different IR's. Due to that, V4L2 API now specifies a standard for mapping Media <row><entry><constant>KEY_LEFT</constant></entry><entry>Left key</entry><entry>LEFT</entry></row> <row><entry><constant>KEY_RIGHT</constant></entry><entry>Right key</entry><entry>RIGHT</entry></row> -<row><entry><emphasis role="bold">Miscelaneous keys</emphasis></entry></row> +<row><entry><emphasis role="bold">Miscellaneous keys</emphasis></entry></row> <row><entry><constant>KEY_DOT</constant></entry><entry>Return a dot</entry><entry>.</entry></row> <row><entry><constant>KEY_FN</constant></entry><entry>Select a function</entry><entry>FUNCTION</entry></row> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/subdev-formats.xml b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/subdev-formats.xml index 7041127d6dfc..d7ccd25edcc1 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/subdev-formats.xml +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/v4l/subdev-formats.xml @@ -456,6 +456,23 @@ <entry>b<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>b<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGBRG8-1X8"> + <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGBRG8_1X8</entry> + <entry>0x3013</entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>g<subscript>7</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>6</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>5</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>4</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>3</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>2</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> + <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SGRBG8-1X8"> <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SGRBG8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x3002</entry> @@ -473,6 +490,23 @@ <entry>g<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>g<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SRGGB8-1X8"> + <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SRGGB8_1X8</entry> + <entry>0x3014</entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>r<subscript>7</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>6</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>5</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>4</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>3</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>2</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>1</subscript></entry> + <entry>r<subscript>0</subscript></entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-SBGGR10-DPCM8-1X8"> <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_SBGGR10_DPCM8_1X8</entry> <entry>0x300b</entry> @@ -2159,6 +2193,31 @@ <entry>u<subscript>1</subscript></entry> <entry>u<subscript>0</subscript></entry> </row> + <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-Y12-1X12"> + <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_Y12_1X12</entry> + <entry>0x2013</entry> + <entry></entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>-</entry> + <entry>y<subscript>11</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>10</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>9</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>8</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>7</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>6</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>5</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>4</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>3</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>2</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>1</subscript></entry> + <entry>y<subscript>0</subscript></entry> + </row> <row id="V4L2-MBUS-FMT-UYVY8-1X16"> <entry>V4L2_MBUS_FMT_UYVY8_1X16</entry> <entry>0x200f</entry> diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl index 0ba149de2608..58ced2346e67 100644 --- a/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl +++ b/Documentation/DocBook/writing-an-alsa-driver.tmpl @@ -4784,7 +4784,7 @@ struct _snd_pcm_runtime { FM registers can be directly accessed through the direct-FM API, defined in <filename><sound/asound_fm.h></filename>. In ALSA native mode, FM registers are accessed through - the Hardware-Dependant Device direct-FM extension API, whereas in + the Hardware-Dependent Device direct-FM extension API, whereas in OSS compatible mode, FM registers can be accessed with the OSS direct-FM compatible API in <filename>/dev/dmfmX</filename> device. </para> diff --git a/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt index dcf7acc720e1..3f5e0b09bed5 100644 --- a/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/PCI/MSI-HOWTO.txt @@ -253,8 +253,8 @@ In constrast, MSI is restricted to a maximum of 32 interrupts (and must be a power of two). In addition, the MSI interrupt vectors must be allocated consecutively, so the system may not be able to allocate as many vectors for MSI as it could for MSI-X. On some platforms, MSI -interrupts must all be targetted at the same set of CPUs whereas MSI-X -interrupts can all be targetted at different CPUs. +interrupts must all be targeted at the same set of CPUs whereas MSI-X +interrupts can all be targeted at different CPUs. 4.5.2 Spinlocks diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX b/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX index 71b6f500ddb9..1d7a885761f5 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX +++ b/Documentation/RCU/00-INDEX @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ rcu.txt RTFP.txt - List of RCU papers (bibliography) going back to 1980. stallwarn.txt - - RCU CPU stall warnings (CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_DETECTOR) + - RCU CPU stall warnings (module parameter rcu_cpu_stall_suppress) torture.txt - RCU Torture Test Operation (CONFIG_RCU_TORTURE_TEST) trace.txt diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt index 862c08ef1fde..4e959208f736 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt @@ -1,22 +1,25 @@ Using RCU's CPU Stall Detector -The CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_DETECTOR kernel config parameter enables -RCU's CPU stall detector, which detects conditions that unduly delay -RCU grace periods. The stall detector's idea of what constitutes -"unduly delayed" is controlled by a set of C preprocessor macros: +The rcu_cpu_stall_suppress module parameter enables RCU's CPU stall +detector, which detects conditions that unduly delay RCU grace periods. +This module parameter enables CPU stall detection by default, but +may be overridden via boot-time parameter or at runtime via sysfs. +The stall detector's idea of what constitutes "unduly delayed" is +controlled by a set of kernel configuration variables and cpp macros: -RCU_SECONDS_TILL_STALL_CHECK +CONFIG_RCU_CPU_STALL_TIMEOUT - This macro defines the period of time that RCU will wait from - the beginning of a grace period until it issues an RCU CPU - stall warning. This time period is normally ten seconds. + This kernel configuration parameter defines the period of time + that RCU will wait from the beginning of a grace period until it + issues an RCU CPU stall warning. This time period is normally + ten seconds. RCU_SECONDS_TILL_STALL_RECHECK This macro defines the period of time that RCU will wait after issuing a stall warning until it issues another stall warning - for the same stall. This time period is normally set to thirty - seconds. + for the same stall. This time period is normally set to three + times the check interval plus thirty seconds. RCU_STALL_RAT_DELAY diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt index 6a8c73f55b80..c078ad48f7a1 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/trace.txt @@ -10,34 +10,46 @@ for rcutree and next for rcutiny. CONFIG_TREE_RCU and CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats -These implementations of RCU provides five debugfs files under the -top-level directory RCU: rcu/rcudata (which displays fields in struct -rcu_data), rcu/rcudata.csv (which is a .csv spreadsheet version of -rcu/rcudata), rcu/rcugp (which displays grace-period counters), -rcu/rcuhier (which displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy), and -rcu/rcu_pending (which displays counts of the reasons that the -rcu_pending() function decided that there was core RCU work to do). +These implementations of RCU provides several debugfs files under the +top-level directory "rcu": + +rcu/rcudata: + Displays fields in struct rcu_data. +rcu/rcudata.csv: + Comma-separated values spreadsheet version of rcudata. +rcu/rcugp: + Displays grace-period counters. +rcu/rcuhier: + Displays the struct rcu_node hierarchy. +rcu/rcu_pending: + Displays counts of the reasons rcu_pending() decided that RCU had + work to do. +rcu/rcutorture: + Displays rcutorture test progress. +rcu/rcuboost: + Displays RCU boosting statistics. Only present if + CONFIG_RCU_BOOST=y. The output of "cat rcu/rcudata" looks as follows: rcu_sched: - 0 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=10951/1 dn=0 df=1101 of=0 ri=36 ql=0 b=10 - 1 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=16117/1 dn=0 df=1015 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 2 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=1445/1 dn=0 df=1839 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 3 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=6681/1 dn=0 df=1545 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 4 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=1003/1 dn=0 df=1992 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 5 c=17829 g=17830 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=1 dt=3887/1 dn=0 df=3331 of=0 ri=4 ql=2 b=10 - 6 c=17829 g=17829 pq=1 pqc=17829 qp=0 dt=859/1 dn=0 df=3224 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 7 c=17829 g=17830 pq=0 pqc=17829 qp=1 dt=3761/1 dn=0 df=1818 of=0 ri=0 ql=2 b=10 + 0 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=50 of=0 ri=0 ql=163 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=153737 co=0 ca=0 + 1 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=58 of=0 ri=0 ql=634 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=191037 co=0 ca=0 + 2 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=175 of=0 ri=0 ql=74 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=75991 co=0 ca=0 + 3 c=20942 g=20943 pq=1 pqc=20942 qp=1 dt=1846/0/0 df=404 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=72261 co=0 ca=0 + 4 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=83 of=0 ri=0 ql=48 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=128365 co=0 ca=0 + 5 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=64 of=0 ri=0 ql=169 qs=NRW. kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=164360 co=0 ca=0 + 6 c=20972 g=20973 pq=1 pqc=20972 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=183 of=0 ri=0 ql=62 qs=N.W. kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=65663 co=0 ca=0 + 7 c=20897 g=20897 pq=1 pqc=20896 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=382 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=75006 co=0 ca=0 rcu_bh: - 0 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=10951/1 dn=0 df=0 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 1 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=16117/1 dn=0 df=13 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 2 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=1445/1 dn=0 df=15 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 3 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=6681/1 dn=0 df=9 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 4 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=1003/1 dn=0 df=15 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 5 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=3887/1 dn=0 df=15 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 6 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=859/1 dn=0 df=15 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 - 7 c=-275 g=-275 pq=1 pqc=-275 qp=0 dt=3761/1 dn=0 df=15 of=0 ri=0 ql=0 b=10 + 0 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=545/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/0 ktl=ebc3 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 1 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=967/1/0 df=3 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/1 ktl=58c b=10 ci=151 co=0 ca=0 + 2 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=1081/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/2 ktl=da94 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 3 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=1846/0/0 df=8 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/3 ktl=d1cd b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 4 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=369/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/4 ktl=e0e7 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 5 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=381/1/0 df=4 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/5 ktl=fb2f b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 6 c=1480 g=1480 pq=1 pqc=1479 qp=0 dt=1037/1/0 df=6 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/6 ktl=d2ad b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 + 7 c=1474 g=1474 pq=1 pqc=1473 qp=0 dt=1572/0/0 df=8 of=0 ri=1 ql=0 qs=.... kt=0/W/7 ktl=cf15 b=10 ci=0 co=0 ca=0 The first section lists the rcu_data structures for rcu_sched, the second for rcu_bh. Note that CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernels will have an @@ -52,17 +64,18 @@ o The number at the beginning of each line is the CPU number. substantially larger than the number of actual CPUs. o "c" is the count of grace periods that this CPU believes have - completed. CPUs in dynticks idle mode may lag quite a ways - behind, for example, CPU 4 under "rcu_sched" above, which has - slept through the past 25 RCU grace periods. It is not unusual - to see CPUs lagging by thousands of grace periods. + completed. Offlined CPUs and CPUs in dynticks idle mode may + lag quite a ways behind, for example, CPU 6 under "rcu_sched" + above, which has been offline through not quite 40,000 RCU grace + periods. It is not unusual to see CPUs lagging by thousands of + grace periods. o "g" is the count of grace periods that this CPU believes have - started. Again, CPUs in dynticks idle mode may lag behind. - If the "c" and "g" values are equal, this CPU has already - reported a quiescent state for the last RCU grace period that - it is aware of, otherwise, the CPU believes that it owes RCU a - quiescent state. + started. Again, offlined CPUs and CPUs in dynticks idle mode + may lag behind. If the "c" and "g" values are equal, this CPU + has already reported a quiescent state for the last RCU grace + period that it is aware of, otherwise, the CPU believes that it + owes RCU a quiescent state. o "pq" indicates that this CPU has passed through a quiescent state for the current grace period. It is possible for "pq" to be @@ -81,7 +94,8 @@ o "pqc" indicates which grace period the last-observed quiescent the next grace period! o "qp" indicates that RCU still expects a quiescent state from - this CPU. + this CPU. Offlined CPUs and CPUs in dyntick idle mode might + well have qp=1, which is OK: RCU is still ignoring them. o "dt" is the current value of the dyntick counter that is incremented when entering or leaving dynticks idle state, either by the @@ -108,7 +122,7 @@ o "df" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a o "of" is the number of times that some other CPU has forced a quiescent state on behalf of this CPU due to this CPU being - offline. In a perfect world, this might neve happen, but it + offline. In a perfect world, this might never happen, but it turns out that offlining and onlining a CPU can take several grace periods, and so there is likely to be an extended period of time when RCU believes that the CPU is online when it really is not. @@ -125,6 +139,62 @@ o "ql" is the number of RCU callbacks currently residing on of what state they are in (new, waiting for grace period to start, waiting for grace period to end, ready to invoke). +o "qs" gives an indication of the state of the callback queue + with four characters: + + "N" Indicates that there are callbacks queued that are not + ready to be handled by the next grace period, and thus + will be handled by the grace period following the next + one. + + "R" Indicates that there are callbacks queued that are + ready to be handled by the next grace period. + + "W" Indicates that there are callbacks queued that are + waiting on the current grace period. + + "D" Indicates that there are callbacks queued that have + already been handled by a prior grace period, and are + thus waiting to be invoked. Note that callbacks in + the process of being invoked are not counted here. + Callbacks in the process of being invoked are those + that have been removed from the rcu_data structures + queues by rcu_do_batch(), but which have not yet been + invoked. + + If there are no callbacks in a given one of the above states, + the corresponding character is replaced by ".". + +o "kt" is the per-CPU kernel-thread state. The digit preceding + the first slash is zero if there is no work pending and 1 + otherwise. The character between the first pair of slashes is + as follows: + + "S" The kernel thread is stopped, in other words, all + CPUs corresponding to this rcu_node structure are + offline. + + "R" The kernel thread is running. + + "W" The kernel thread is waiting because there is no work + for it to do. + + "O" The kernel thread is waiting because it has been + forced off of its designated CPU or because its + ->cpus_allowed mask permits it to run on other than + its designated CPU. + + "Y" The kernel thread is yielding to avoid hogging CPU. + + "?" Unknown value, indicates a bug. + + The number after the final slash is the CPU that the kthread + is actually running on. + +o "ktl" is the low-order 16 bits (in hexadecimal) of the count of + the number of times that this CPU's per-CPU kthread has gone + through its loop servicing invoke_rcu_cpu_kthread() requests. + o "b" is the batch limit for this CPU. If more than this number of RCU callbacks is ready to invoke, then the remainder will be deferred. @@ -174,14 +244,14 @@ o "gpnum" is the number of grace periods that have started. It is The output of "cat rcu/rcuhier" looks as follows, with very long lines: c=6902 g=6903 s=2 jfq=3 j=72c7 nfqs=13142/nfqsng=0(13142) fqlh=6 -1/1 .>. 0:127 ^0 -3/3 .>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 .>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 .>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 .>. 108:127 ^3 -3/3f .>. 0:5 ^0 2/3 .>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 .>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 .>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 .>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 .>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 .>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 .>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 .>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 .>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 .>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 .>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 .>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 .>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 .>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 .>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 .>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 .>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 .>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 .>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 .>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 .>. 126:127 ^3 +1/1 ..>. 0:127 ^0 +3/3 ..>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 ..>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 ..>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 ..>. 108:127 ^3 +3/3f ..>. 0:5 ^0 2/3 ..>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 ..>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 ..>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 ..>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 ..>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 ..>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 ..>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 ..>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 ..>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 ..>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 ..>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 ..>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 ..>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 ..>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 ..>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 ..>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 ..>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 ..>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 ..>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 ..>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 ..>. 126:127 ^3 rcu_bh: c=-226 g=-226 s=1 jfq=-5701 j=72c7 nfqs=88/nfqsng=0(88) fqlh=0 -0/1 .>. 0:127 ^0 -0/3 .>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 .>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 .>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 .>. 108:127 ^3 -0/3f .>. 0:5 ^0 0/3 .>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 .>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 .>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 .>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 .>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 .>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 .>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 .>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 .>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 .>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 .>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 .>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 .>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 .>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 .>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 .>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 .>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 .>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 .>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 .>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 .>. 126:127 ^3 +0/1 ..>. 0:127 ^0 +0/3 ..>. 0:35 ^0 0/0 ..>. 36:71 ^1 0/0 ..>. 72:107 ^2 0/0 ..>. 108:127 ^3 +0/3f ..>. 0:5 ^0 0/3 ..>. 6:11 ^1 0/0 ..>. 12:17 ^2 0/0 ..>. 18:23 ^3 0/0 ..>. 24:29 ^4 0/0 ..>. 30:35 ^5 0/0 ..>. 36:41 ^0 0/0 ..>. 42:47 ^1 0/0 ..>. 48:53 ^2 0/0 ..>. 54:59 ^3 0/0 ..>. 60:65 ^4 0/0 ..>. 66:71 ^5 0/0 ..>. 72:77 ^0 0/0 ..>. 78:83 ^1 0/0 ..>. 84:89 ^2 0/0 ..>. 90:95 ^3 0/0 ..>. 96:101 ^4 0/0 ..>. 102:107 ^5 0/0 ..>. 108:113 ^0 0/0 ..>. 114:119 ^1 0/0 ..>. 120:125 ^2 0/0 ..>. 126:127 ^3 This is once again split into "rcu_sched" and "rcu_bh" portions, and CONFIG_TREE_PREEMPT_RCU kernels will again have an additional @@ -240,13 +310,20 @@ o Each element of the form "1/1 0:127 ^0" represents one struct current grace period. o The characters separated by the ">" indicate the state - of the blocked-tasks lists. A "T" preceding the ">" + of the blocked-tasks lists. A "G" preceding the ">" indicates that at least one task blocked in an RCU read-side critical section blocks the current grace - period, while a "." preceding the ">" indicates otherwise. - The character following the ">" indicates similarly for - the next grace period. A "T" should appear in this - field only for rcu-preempt. + period, while a "E" preceding the ">" indicates that + at least one task blocked in an RCU read-side critical + section blocks the current expedited grace period. + A "T" character following the ">" indicates that at + least one task is blocked within an RCU read-side + critical section, regardless of whether any current + grace period (expedited or normal) is inconvenienced. + A "." character appears if the corresponding condition + does not hold, so that "..>." indicates that no tasks + are blocked. In contrast, "GE>T" indicates maximal + inconvenience from blocked tasks. o The numbers separated by the ":" are the range of CPUs served by this struct rcu_node. This can be helpful @@ -328,6 +405,113 @@ o "nn" is the number of times that this CPU needed nothing. Alert is due to short-circuit evaluation in rcu_pending(). +The output of "cat rcu/rcutorture" looks as follows: + +rcutorture test sequence: 0 (test in progress) +rcutorture update version number: 615 + +The first line shows the number of rcutorture tests that have completed +since boot. If a test is currently running, the "(test in progress)" +string will appear as shown above. The second line shows the number of +update cycles that the current test has started, or zero if there is +no test in progress. + + +The output of "cat rcu/rcuboost" looks as follows: + +0:5 tasks=.... kt=W ntb=0 neb=0 nnb=0 j=2f95 bt=300f + balk: nt=0 egt=989 bt=0 nb=0 ny=0 nos=16 +6:7 tasks=.... kt=W ntb=0 neb=0 nnb=0 j=2f95 bt=300f + balk: nt=0 egt=225 bt=0 nb=0 ny=0 nos=6 + +This information is output only for rcu_preempt. Each two-line entry +corresponds to a leaf rcu_node strcuture. The fields are as follows: + +o "n:m" is the CPU-number range for the corresponding two-line + entry. In the sample output above, the first entry covers + CPUs zero through five and the second entry covers CPUs 6 + and 7. + +o "tasks=TNEB" gives the state of the various segments of the + rnp->blocked_tasks list: + + "T" This indicates that there are some tasks that blocked + while running on one of the corresponding CPUs while + in an RCU read-side critical section. + + "N" This indicates that some of the blocked tasks are preventing + the current normal (non-expedited) grace period from + completing. + + "E" This indicates that some of the blocked tasks are preventing + the current expedited grace period from completing. + + "B" This indicates that some of the blocked tasks are in + need of RCU priority boosting. + + Each character is replaced with "." if the corresponding + condition does not hold. + +o "kt" is the state of the RCU priority-boosting kernel + thread associated with the corresponding rcu_node structure. + The state can be one of the following: + + "S" The kernel thread is stopped, in other words, all + CPUs corresponding to this rcu_node structure are + offline. + + "R" The kernel thread is running. + + "W" The kernel thread is waiting because there is no work + for it to do. + + "Y" The kernel thread is yielding to avoid hogging CPU. + + "?" Unknown value, indicates a bug. + +o "ntb" is the number of tasks boosted. + +o "neb" is the number of tasks boosted in order to complete an + expedited grace period. + +o "nnb" is the number of tasks boosted in order to complete a + normal (non-expedited) grace period. When boosting a task + that was blocking both an expedited and a normal grace period, + it is counted against the expedited total above. + +o "j" is the low-order 16 bits of the jiffies counter in + hexadecimal. + +o "bt" is the low-order 16 bits of the value that the jiffies + counter will have when we next start boosting, assuming that + the current grace period does not end beforehand. This is + also in hexadecimal. + +o "balk: nt" counts the number of times we didn't boost (in + other words, we balked) even though it was time to boost because + there were no blocked tasks to boost. This situation occurs + when there is one blocked task on one rcu_node structure and + none on some other rcu_node structure. + +o "egt" counts the number of times we balked because although + there were blocked tasks, none of them were blocking the + current grace period, whether expedited or otherwise. + +o "bt" counts the number of times we balked because boosting + had already been initiated for the current grace period. + +o "nb" counts the number of times we balked because there + was at least one task blocking the current non-expedited grace + period that never had blocked. If it is already running, it + just won't help to boost its priority! + +o "ny" counts the number of times we balked because it was + not yet time to start boosting. + +o "nos" counts the number of times we balked for other + reasons, e.g., the grace period ended first. + + CONFIG_TINY_RCU and CONFIG_TINY_PREEMPT_RCU debugfs Files and Formats These implementations of RCU provides a single debugfs file under the @@ -394,9 +578,9 @@ o "neb" is the number of expedited grace periods that have had o "nnb" is the number of normal grace periods that have had to resort to RCU priority boosting since boot. -o "j" is the low-order 12 bits of the jiffies counter in hexadecimal. +o "j" is the low-order 16 bits of the jiffies counter in hexadecimal. -o "bt" is the low-order 12 bits of the value that the jiffies counter +o "bt" is the low-order 16 bits of the value that the jiffies counter will have at the next time that boosting is scheduled to begin. o In the line beginning with "normal balk", the fields are as follows: diff --git a/Documentation/SecurityBugs b/Documentation/SecurityBugs index 26c3b3635d9f..a660d494c8ed 100644 --- a/Documentation/SecurityBugs +++ b/Documentation/SecurityBugs @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ expect these delays to be short, measurable in days, not weeks or months. A disclosure date is negotiated by the security team working with the bug submitter as well as vendors. However, the kernel security team holds the final say when setting a disclosure date. The timeframe for -disclosure is from immediate (esp. if it's already publically known) +disclosure is from immediate (esp. if it's already publicly known) to a few weeks. As a basic default policy, we expect report date to disclosure date to be on the order of 7 days. diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers b/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers index 38d2aab59cac..319baa8b60dd 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingDrivers @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ PM support: Since Linux is used on many portable and desktop systems, your complete overview of the power management issues related to drivers see Documentation/power/devices.txt . -Control: In general if there is active maintainance of a driver by +Control: In general if there is active maintenance of a driver by the author then patches will be redirected to them unless they are totally obvious and without need of checking. If you want to be the contact and update point for the diff --git a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches index 689e2371095c..e439cd0d3375 100644 --- a/Documentation/SubmittingPatches +++ b/Documentation/SubmittingPatches @@ -729,7 +729,7 @@ Linus Torvalds's mail on the canonical patch format: <http://lkml.org/lkml/2005/4/7/183> Andi Kleen, "On submitting kernel patches" - Some strategies to get difficult or controversal changes in. + Some strategies to get difficult or controversial changes in. http://halobates.de/on-submitting-patches.pdf -- diff --git a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx index 133c5fa6c7a1..7b9351f2f555 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx +++ b/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx @@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Linux currently supports the following features on the IXP4xx chips: - Timers (watchdog, OS) The following components of the chips are not supported by Linux and -require the use of Intel's propietary CSR softare: +require the use of Intel's proprietary CSR softare: - USB device interface - Network interfaces (HSS, Utopia, NPEs, etc) @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ software from: http://developer.intel.com/design/network/products/npfamily/ixp425.htm -DO NOT POST QUESTIONS TO THE LINUX MAILING LISTS REGARDING THE PROPIETARY +DO NOT POST QUESTIONS TO THE LINUX MAILING LISTS REGARDING THE PROPRIETARY SOFTWARE. There are several websites that provide directions/pointers on using diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt index 7edd0e2e6c5b..1ca63b3e5635 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt @@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Configuration Allows the entire memory to be checksummed before and after the suspend to see if there has been any corruption of the contents. - Note, the time to calculate the CRC is dependant on the CPU speed + Note, the time to calculate the CRC is dependent on the CPU speed and the size of memory. For an 64Mbyte RAM area on an 200MHz S3C2410, this can take approximately 4 seconds to complete. diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt index 05850c62abeb..513f2562c1a3 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt +++ b/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Introduction ------------ This outlines the Samsung GPIO implementation and the architecture -specfic calls provided alongisde the drivers/gpio core. +specific calls provided alongisde the drivers/gpio core. S3C24XX (Legacy) diff --git a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt index 2a7b38c832c7..c6d84cfd2f56 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt +++ b/Documentation/block/biodoc.txt @@ -497,7 +497,7 @@ The scatter gather list is in the form of an array of <page, offset, len> entries with their corresponding dma address mappings filled in at the appropriate time. As an optimization, contiguous physical pages can be covered by a single entry where <page> refers to the first page and <len> -covers the range of pages (upto 16 contiguous pages could be covered this +covers the range of pages (up to 16 contiguous pages could be covered this way). There is a helper routine (blk_rq_map_sg) which drivers can use to build the sg list. @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ struct request { . int tag; /* command tag associated with request */ void *special; /* same as before */ - char *buffer; /* valid only for low memory buffers upto + char *buffer; /* valid only for low memory buffers up to current_nr_sectors */ . . diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt index cbdfb7d9455b..aedf1bd02fdd 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/cgroups.txt @@ -110,22 +110,22 @@ university server with various users - students, professors, system tasks etc. The resource planning for this server could be along the following lines: - CPU : Top cpuset + CPU : "Top cpuset" / \ CPUSet1 CPUSet2 - | | - (Profs) (Students) + | | + (Professors) (Students) In addition (system tasks) are attached to topcpuset (so that they can run anywhere) with a limit of 20% - Memory : Professors (50%), students (30%), system (20%) + Memory : Professors (50%), Students (30%), system (20%) - Disk : Prof (50%), students (30%), system (20%) + Disk : Professors (50%), Students (30%), system (20%) Network : WWW browsing (20%), Network File System (60%), others (20%) / \ - Prof (15%) students (5%) + Professors (15%) students (5%) Browsers like Firefox/Lynx go into the WWW network class, while (k)nfsd go into NFS network class. diff --git a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt index b6ed61c95856..7c163477fcd8 100644 --- a/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt +++ b/Documentation/cgroups/memory.txt @@ -52,8 +52,10 @@ Brief summary of control files. tasks # attach a task(thread) and show list of threads cgroup.procs # show list of processes cgroup.event_control # an interface for event_fd() - memory.usage_in_bytes # show current memory(RSS+Cache) usage. - memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes # show current memory+Swap usage + memory.usage_in_bytes # show current res_counter usage for memory + (See 5.5 for details) + memory.memsw.usage_in_bytes # show current res_counter usage for memory+Swap + (See 5.5 for details) memory.limit_in_bytes # set/show limit of memory usage memory.memsw.limit_in_bytes # set/show limit of memory+Swap usage memory.failcnt # show the number of memory usage hits limits @@ -453,6 +455,15 @@ memory under it will be reclaimed. You can reset failcnt by writing 0 to failcnt file. # echo 0 > .../memory.failcnt +5.5 usage_in_bytes + +For efficiency, as other kernel components, memory cgroup uses some optimization +to avoid unnecessary cacheline false sharing. usage_in_bytes is affected by the +method and doesn't show 'exact' value of memory(and swap) usage, it's an fuzz +value for efficient access. (Of course, when necessary, it's synchronized.) +If you want to know more exact memory usage, you should use RSS+CACHE(+SWAP) +value in memory.stat(see 5.2). + 6. Hierarchy support The memory controller supports a deep hierarchy and hierarchical accounting. diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt index 45d5a217484f..a20bfd415e41 100644 --- a/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt +++ b/Documentation/cpu-hotplug.txt @@ -196,7 +196,7 @@ the state as 0 when a cpu if offline and 1 when its online. #To display the current cpu state. #cat /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/online -Q: Why cant i remove CPU0 on some systems? +Q: Why can't i remove CPU0 on some systems? A: Some architectures may have some special dependency on a certain CPU. For e.g in IA64 platforms we have ability to sent platform interrupts to the diff --git a/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt b/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt index 15174985ad08..d262e22bddec 100644 --- a/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt +++ b/Documentation/dell_rbu.txt @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ image file and then arrange all these packets back to back in to one single file. This file is then copied to /sys/class/firmware/dell_rbu/data. Once this file gets to the driver, the driver extracts packet_size data from -the file and spreads it accross the physical memory in contiguous packet_sized +the file and spreads it across the physical memory in contiguous packet_sized space. This method makes sure that all the packets get to the driver in a single operation. diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/1.Intro b/Documentation/development-process/1.Intro index 8cc2cba2b10d..9b614480aa84 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/1.Intro +++ b/Documentation/development-process/1.Intro @@ -56,13 +56,13 @@ information on kernel development. 1.2: WHAT THIS DOCUMENT IS ABOUT -The Linux kernel, at over 6 million lines of code and well over 1000 active -contributors, is one of the largest and most active free software projects -in existence. Since its humble beginning in 1991, this kernel has evolved -into a best-of-breed operating system component which runs on pocket-sized -digital music players, desktop PCs, the largest supercomputers in -existence, and all types of systems in between. It is a robust, efficient, -and scalable solution for almost any situation. +The Linux kernel, at over 8 million lines of code and well over 1000 +contributors to each release, is one of the largest and most active free +software projects in existence. Since its humble beginning in 1991, this +kernel has evolved into a best-of-breed operating system component which +runs on pocket-sized digital music players, desktop PCs, the largest +supercomputers in existence, and all types of systems in between. It is a +robust, efficient, and scalable solution for almost any situation. With the growth of Linux has come an increase in the number of developers (and companies) wishing to participate in its development. Hardware @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ This document was written by Jonathan Corbet, corbet@lwn.net. It has been improved by comments from Johannes Berg, James Berry, Alex Chiang, Roland Dreier, Randy Dunlap, Jake Edge, Jiri Kosina, Matt Mackall, Arthur Marsh, Amanda McPherson, Andrew Morton, Andrew Price, Tsugikazu Shibata, and -Jochen Voß. +Jochen Voß. This work was supported by the Linux Foundation; thanks especially to Amanda McPherson, who saw the value of this effort and made it all happen. @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ include: - Everything that was said above about code review applies doubly to closed-source code. Since this code is not available at all, it cannot have been reviewed by the community and will, beyond doubt, have serious - problems. + problems. Makers of embedded systems, in particular, may be tempted to disregard much of what has been said in this section in the belief that they are shipping diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/2.Process b/Documentation/development-process/2.Process index 911a45186340..4823577c6509 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/2.Process +++ b/Documentation/development-process/2.Process @@ -14,16 +14,15 @@ The kernel developers use a loosely time-based release process, with a new major kernel release happening every two or three months. The recent release history looks like this: - 2.6.26 July 13, 2008 - 2.6.25 April 16, 2008 - 2.6.24 January 24, 2008 - 2.6.23 October 9, 2007 - 2.6.22 July 8, 2007 - 2.6.21 April 25, 2007 - 2.6.20 February 4, 2007 + 2.6.38 March 14, 2011 + 2.6.37 January 4, 2011 + 2.6.36 October 20, 2010 + 2.6.35 August 1, 2010 + 2.6.34 May 15, 2010 + 2.6.33 February 24, 2010 Every 2.6.x release is a major kernel release with new features, internal -API changes, and more. A typical 2.6 release can contain over 10,000 +API changes, and more. A typical 2.6 release can contain nearly 10,000 changesets with changes to several hundred thousand lines of code. 2.6 is thus the leading edge of Linux kernel development; the kernel uses a rolling development model which is continually integrating major changes. @@ -42,13 +41,13 @@ merge window do not come out of thin air; they have been collected, tested, and staged ahead of time. How that process works will be described in detail later on). -The merge window lasts for two weeks. At the end of this time, Linus -Torvalds will declare that the window is closed and release the first of -the "rc" kernels. For the kernel which is destined to be 2.6.26, for -example, the release which happens at the end of the merge window will be -called 2.6.26-rc1. The -rc1 release is the signal that the time to merge -new features has passed, and that the time to stabilize the next kernel has -begun. +The merge window lasts for approximately two weeks. At the end of this +time, Linus Torvalds will declare that the window is closed and release the +first of the "rc" kernels. For the kernel which is destined to be 2.6.40, +for example, the release which happens at the end of the merge window will +be called 2.6.40-rc1. The -rc1 release is the signal that the time to +merge new features has passed, and that the time to stabilize the next +kernel has begun. Over the next six to ten weeks, only patches which fix problems should be submitted to the mainline. On occasion a more significant change will be @@ -66,20 +65,19 @@ will get up to somewhere between -rc6 and -rc9 before the kernel is considered to be sufficiently stable and the final 2.6.x release is made. At that point the whole process starts over again. -As an example, here is how the 2.6.25 development cycle went (all dates in -2008): - - January 24 2.6.24 stable release - February 10 2.6.25-rc1, merge window closes - February 15 2.6.25-rc2 - February 24 2.6.25-rc3 - March 4 2.6.25-rc4 - March 9 2.6.25-rc5 - March 16 2.6.25-rc6 - March 25 2.6.25-rc7 - April 1 2.6.25-rc8 - April 11 2.6.25-rc9 - April 16 2.6.25 stable release +As an example, here is how the 2.6.38 development cycle went (all dates in +2011): + + January 4 2.6.37 stable release + January 18 2.6.38-rc1, merge window closes + January 21 2.6.38-rc2 + February 1 2.6.38-rc3 + February 7 2.6.38-rc4 + February 15 2.6.38-rc5 + February 21 2.6.38-rc6 + March 1 2.6.38-rc7 + March 7 2.6.38-rc8 + March 14 2.6.38 stable release How do the developers decide when to close the development cycle and create the stable release? The most significant metric used is the list of @@ -87,7 +85,7 @@ regressions from previous releases. No bugs are welcome, but those which break systems which worked in the past are considered to be especially serious. For this reason, patches which cause regressions are looked upon unfavorably and are quite likely to be reverted during the stabilization -period. +period. The developers' goal is to fix all known regressions before the stable release is made. In the real world, this kind of perfection is hard to @@ -99,26 +97,34 @@ kernels go out with a handful of known regressions though, hopefully, none of them are serious. Once a stable release is made, its ongoing maintenance is passed off to the -"stable team," currently comprised of Greg Kroah-Hartman and Chris Wright. -The stable team will release occasional updates to the stable release using -the 2.6.x.y numbering scheme. To be considered for an update release, a -patch must (1) fix a significant bug, and (2) already be merged into the -mainline for the next development kernel. Continuing our 2.6.25 example, -the history (as of this writing) is: - - May 1 2.6.25.1 - May 6 2.6.25.2 - May 9 2.6.25.3 - May 15 2.6.25.4 - June 7 2.6.25.5 - June 9 2.6.25.6 - June 16 2.6.25.7 - June 21 2.6.25.8 - June 24 2.6.25.9 - -Stable updates for a given kernel are made for approximately six months; -after that, the maintenance of stable releases is solely the responsibility -of the distributors which have shipped that particular kernel. +"stable team," currently consisting of Greg Kroah-Hartman. The stable team +will release occasional updates to the stable release using the 2.6.x.y +numbering scheme. To be considered for an update release, a patch must (1) +fix a significant bug, and (2) already be merged into the mainline for the +next development kernel. Kernels will typically receive stable updates for +a little more than one development cycle past their initial release. So, +for example, the 2.6.36 kernel's history looked like: + + October 10 2.6.36 stable release + November 22 2.6.36.1 + December 9 2.6.36.2 + January 7 2.6.36.3 + February 17 2.6.36.4 + +2.6.36.4 was the final stable update for the 2.6.36 release. + +Some kernels are designated "long term" kernels; they will receive support +for a longer period. As of this writing, the current long term kernels +and their maintainers are: + + 2.6.27 Willy Tarreau (Deep-frozen stable kernel) + 2.6.32 Greg Kroah-Hartman + 2.6.35 Andi Kleen (Embedded flag kernel) + +The selection of a kernel for long-term support is purely a matter of a +maintainer having the need and the time to maintain that release. There +are no known plans for long-term support for any specific upcoming +release. 2.2: THE LIFECYCLE OF A PATCH @@ -130,7 +136,7 @@ each patch implements a change which is desirable to have in the mainline. This process can happen quickly for minor fixes, or, in the case of large and controversial changes, go on for years. Much developer frustration comes from a lack of understanding of this process or from attempts to -circumvent it. +circumvent it. In the hopes of reducing that frustration, this document will describe how a patch gets into the kernel. What follows below is an introduction which @@ -193,8 +199,8 @@ involved. 2.3: HOW PATCHES GET INTO THE KERNEL There is exactly one person who can merge patches into the mainline kernel -repository: Linus Torvalds. But, of the over 12,000 patches which went -into the 2.6.25 kernel, only 250 (around 2%) were directly chosen by Linus +repository: Linus Torvalds. But, of the over 9,500 patches which went +into the 2.6.38 kernel, only 112 (around 1.3%) were directly chosen by Linus himself. The kernel project has long since grown to a size where no single developer could possibly inspect and select every patch unassisted. The way the kernel developers have addressed this growth is through the use of @@ -229,7 +235,7 @@ first in trees dedicated to network device drivers, wireless networking, etc. This chain of repositories can be arbitrarily long, though it rarely exceeds two or three links. Since each maintainer in the chain trusts those managing lower-level trees, this process is known as the "chain of -trust." +trust." Clearly, in a system like this, getting patches into the kernel depends on finding the right maintainer. Sending patches directly to Linus is not @@ -254,7 +260,7 @@ The answer comes in the form of -next trees, where subsystem trees are collected for testing and review. The older of these trees, maintained by Andrew Morton, is called "-mm" (for memory management, which is how it got started). The -mm tree integrates patches from a long list of subsystem -trees; it also has some patches aimed at helping with debugging. +trees; it also has some patches aimed at helping with debugging. Beyond that, -mm contains a significant collection of patches which have been selected by Andrew directly. These patches may have been posted on a @@ -264,8 +270,8 @@ subsystem tree of last resort; if there is no other obvious path for a patch into the mainline, it is likely to end up in -mm. Miscellaneous patches which accumulate in -mm will eventually either be forwarded on to an appropriate subsystem tree or be sent directly to Linus. In a typical -development cycle, approximately 10% of the patches going into the mainline -get there via -mm. +development cycle, approximately 5-10% of the patches going into the +mainline get there via -mm. The current -mm patch is available in the "mmotm" (-mm of the moment) directory at: @@ -275,7 +281,7 @@ directory at: Use of the MMOTM tree is likely to be a frustrating experience, though; there is a definite chance that it will not even compile. -The other -next tree, started more recently, is linux-next, maintained by +The primary tree for next-cycle patch merging is linux-next, maintained by Stephen Rothwell. The linux-next tree is, by design, a snapshot of what the mainline is expected to look like after the next merge window closes. Linux-next trees are announced on the linux-kernel and linux-next mailing @@ -287,25 +293,14 @@ Some information about linux-next has been gathered at: http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/ -How the linux-next tree will fit into the development process is still -changing. As of this writing, the first full development cycle involving -linux-next (2.6.26) is coming to an end; thus far, it has proved to be a -valuable resource for finding and fixing integration problems before the -beginning of the merge window. See http://lwn.net/Articles/287155/ for -more information on how linux-next has worked to set up the 2.6.27 merge -window. - -Some developers have begun to suggest that linux-next should be used as the -target for future development as well. The linux-next tree does tend to be -far ahead of the mainline and is more representative of the tree into which -any new work will be merged. The downside to this idea is that the -volatility of linux-next tends to make it a difficult development target. -See http://lwn.net/Articles/289013/ for more information on this topic, and -stay tuned; much is still in flux where linux-next is involved. +Linux-next has become an integral part of the kernel development process; +all patches merged during a given merge window should really have found +their way into linux-next some time before the merge window opens. + 2.4.1: STAGING TREES -The kernel source tree now contains the drivers/staging/ directory, where +The kernel source tree contains the drivers/staging/ directory, where many sub-directories for drivers or filesystems that are on their way to being added to the kernel tree live. They remain in drivers/staging while they still need more work; once complete, they can be moved into the @@ -313,15 +308,23 @@ kernel proper. This is a way to keep track of drivers that aren't up to Linux kernel coding or quality standards, but people may want to use them and track development. -Greg Kroah-Hartman currently (as of 2.6.36) maintains the staging tree. -Drivers that still need work are sent to him, with each driver having -its own subdirectory in drivers/staging/. Along with the driver source -files, a TODO file should be present in the directory as well. The TODO -file lists the pending work that the driver needs for acceptance into -the kernel proper, as well as a list of people that should be Cc'd for any -patches to the driver. Staging drivers that don't currently build should -have their config entries depend upon CONFIG_BROKEN. Once they can -be successfully built without outside patches, CONFIG_BROKEN can be removed. +Greg Kroah-Hartman currently maintains the staging tree. Drivers that +still need work are sent to him, with each driver having its own +subdirectory in drivers/staging/. Along with the driver source files, a +TODO file should be present in the directory as well. The TODO file lists +the pending work that the driver needs for acceptance into the kernel +proper, as well as a list of people that should be Cc'd for any patches to +the driver. Current rules require that drivers contributed to staging +must, at a minimum, compile properly. + +Staging can be a relatively easy way to get new drivers into the mainline +where, with luck, they will come to the attention of other developers and +improve quickly. Entry into staging is not the end of the story, though; +code in staging which is not seeing regular progress will eventually be +removed. Distributors also tend to be relatively reluctant to enable +staging drivers. So staging is, at best, a stop on the way toward becoming +a proper mainline driver. + 2.5: TOOLS @@ -347,11 +350,7 @@ page at: http://git-scm.com/ -That page has pointers to documentation and tutorials. One should be -aware, in particular, of the Kernel Hacker's Guide to git, which has -information specific to kernel development: - - http://linux.yyz.us/git-howto.html +That page has pointers to documentation and tutorials. Among the kernel developers who do not use git, the most popular choice is almost certainly Mercurial: @@ -408,7 +407,7 @@ There are a few hints which can help with linux-kernel survival: important to filter on both the topic of interest (though note that long-running conversations can drift away from the original subject without changing the email subject line) and the people who are - participating. + participating. - Do not feed the trolls. If somebody is trying to stir up an angry response, ignore them. diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage b/Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage index 307a159a70ca..f87ba7b3fbac 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage +++ b/Documentation/development-process/3.Early-stage @@ -110,8 +110,8 @@ the kernel community's standards. Some examples include: - The AppArmor security module made use of internal virtual filesystem data structures in ways which were considered to be unsafe and - unreliable. This code has since been significantly reworked, but - remains outside of the mainline. + unreliable. This concern (among others) kept AppArmor out of the + mainline for years. In each of these cases, a great deal of pain and extra work could have been avoided with some early discussion with the kernel developers. @@ -138,6 +138,19 @@ patches, and who, if anybody, is attaching Signed-off-by lines to those patches. Those are the people who will be best placed to help with a new development project. +The task of finding the right maintainer is sometimes challenging enough +that the kernel developers have added a script to ease the process: + + .../scripts/get_maintainer.pl + +This script will return the current maintainer(s) for a given file or +directory when given the "-f" option. If passed a patch on the +command line, it will list the maintainers who should probably receive +copies of the patch. There are a number of options regulating how hard +get_maintainer.pl will search for maintainers; please be careful about +using the more aggressive options as you may end up including developers +who have no real interest in the code you are modifying. + If all else fails, talking to Andrew Morton can be an effective way to track down a maintainer for a specific piece of code. @@ -155,11 +168,15 @@ reaction, but, instead, little or no reaction at all. The sad truth of the matter is (1) kernel developers tend to be busy, (2) there is no shortage of people with grand plans and little code (or even prospect of code) to back them up, and (3) nobody is obligated to review or comment on ideas -posted by others. If a request-for-comments posting yields little in the -way of comments, do not assume that it means there is no interest in the -project. Unfortunately, you also cannot assume that there are no problems -with your idea. The best thing to do in this situation is to proceed, -keeping the community informed as you go. +posted by others. Beyond that, high-level designs often hide problems +which are only reviewed when somebody actually tries to implement those +designs; for that reason, kernel developers would rather see the code. + +If a request-for-comments posting yields little in the way of comments, do +not assume that it means there is no interest in the project. +Unfortunately, you also cannot assume that there are no problems with your +idea. The best thing to do in this situation is to proceed, keeping the +community informed as you go. 3.5: GETTING OFFICIAL BUY-IN diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding b/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding index 2278693c8ffa..f3f1a469443c 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding +++ b/Documentation/development-process/4.Coding @@ -131,6 +131,11 @@ classic time/space tradeoff taught in beginning data structures classes often does not apply to contemporary hardware. Space *is* time, in that a larger program will run slower than one which is more compact. +More recent compilers take an increasingly active role in deciding whether +a given function should actually be inlined or not. So the liberal +placement of "inline" keywords may not just be excessive; it could also be +irrelevant. + * Locking @@ -285,6 +290,13 @@ be found at https://sparse.wiki.kernel.org/index.php/Main_Page if your distributor does not package it); it can then be run on the code by adding "C=1" to your make command. +The "Coccinelle" tool (http://coccinelle.lip6.fr/) is able to find a wide +variety of potential coding problems; it can also propose fixes for those +problems. Quite a few "semantic patches" for the kernel have been packaged +under the scripts/coccinelle directory; running "make coccicheck" will run +through those semantic patches and report on any problems found. See +Documentation/coccinelle.txt for more information. + Other kinds of portability errors are best found by compiling your code for other architectures. If you do not happen to have an S/390 system or a Blackfin development board handy, you can still perform the compilation @@ -308,7 +320,9 @@ The first piece of documentation for any patch is its associated changelog. Log entries should describe the problem being solved, the form of the solution, the people who worked on the patch, any relevant effects on performance, and anything else that might be needed to -understand the patch. +understand the patch. Be sure that the changelog says *why* the patch is +worth applying; a surprising number of developers fail to provide that +information. Any code which adds a new user-space interface - including new sysfs or /proc files - should include documentation of that interface which enables @@ -321,7 +335,7 @@ boot-time parameters. Any patch which adds new parameters should add the appropriate entries to this file. Any new configuration options must be accompanied by help text which -clearly explains the options and when the user might want to select them. +clearly explains the options and when the user might want to select them. Internal API information for many subsystems is documented by way of specially-formatted comments; these comments can be extracted and formatted @@ -372,7 +386,8 @@ which is broken by the change. For a widely-used function, this duty can lead to literally hundreds or thousands of changes - many of which are likely to conflict with work being done by other developers. Needless to say, this can be a large job, so it is best to be sure that the -justification is solid. +justification is solid. Note that the Coccinelle tool can help with +wide-ranging API changes. When making an incompatible API change, one should, whenever possible, ensure that code which has not been updated is caught by the compiler. diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/5.Posting b/Documentation/development-process/5.Posting index f622c1e9f0f9..903a2546f138 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/5.Posting +++ b/Documentation/development-process/5.Posting @@ -60,12 +60,15 @@ even in the short term. Patches must be prepared against a specific version of the kernel. As a general rule, a patch should be based on the current mainline as found in -Linus's git tree. It may become necessary to make versions against -mm, -linux-next, or a subsystem tree, though, to facilitate wider testing and -review. Depending on the area of your patch and what is going on -elsewhere, basing a patch against these other trees can require a -significant amount of work resolving conflicts and dealing with API -changes. +Linus's git tree. When basing on mainline, start with a well-known release +point - a stable or -rc release - rather than branching off the mainline at +an arbitrary spot. + +It may become necessary to make versions against -mm, linux-next, or a +subsystem tree, though, to facilitate wider testing and review. Depending +on the area of your patch and what is going on elsewhere, basing a patch +against these other trees can require a significant amount of work +resolving conflicts and dealing with API changes. Only the most simple changes should be formatted as a single patch; everything else should be made as a logical series of changes. Splitting @@ -100,11 +103,11 @@ rules of thumb, however, which can help considerably: result is a broken kernel, you will make life harder for developers and users who are engaging in the noble work of tracking down problems. - - Do not overdo it, though. One developer recently posted a set of edits + - Do not overdo it, though. One developer once posted a set of edits to a single file as 500 separate patches - an act which did not make him the most popular person on the kernel mailing list. A single patch can be reasonably large as long as it still contains a single *logical* - change. + change. - It can be tempting to add a whole new infrastructure with a series of patches, but to leave that infrastructure unused until the final patch @@ -162,7 +165,8 @@ To that end, the summary line should describe the effects of and motivation for the change as well as possible given the one-line constraint. The detailed description can then amplify on those topics and provide any needed additional information. If the patch fixes a bug, cite the commit -which introduced the bug if possible. If a problem is associated with +which introduced the bug if possible (and please provide both the commit ID +and the title when citing commits). If a problem is associated with specific log or compiler output, include that output to help others searching for a solution to the same problem. If the change is meant to support other changes coming in later patch, say so. If internal APIs are @@ -230,7 +234,7 @@ take care of: which have had gratuitous white-space changes or line wrapping performed by the mail client will not apply at the other end, and often will not be examined in any detail. If there is any doubt at all, mail the patch - to yourself and convince yourself that it shows up intact. + to yourself and convince yourself that it shows up intact. Documentation/email-clients.txt has some helpful hints on making specific mail clients work for sending patches. @@ -287,7 +291,7 @@ something like: where "nn" is the ordinal number of the patch, "mm" is the total number of patches in the series, and "subsys" is the name of the affected subsystem. -Clearly, nn/mm can be omitted for a single, standalone patch. +Clearly, nn/mm can be omitted for a single, standalone patch. If you have a significant series of patches, it is customary to send an introductory description as part zero. This convention is not universally @@ -299,5 +303,5 @@ In general, the second and following parts of a multi-part patch should be sent as a reply to the first part so that they all thread together at the receiving end. Tools like git and quilt have commands to mail out a set of patches with the proper threading. If you have a long series, though, and -are using git, please provide the --no-chain-reply-to option to avoid +are using git, please stay away from the --chain-reply-to option to avoid creating exceptionally deep nesting. diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough b/Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough index a8fba3d83a85..41d324a9420d 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough +++ b/Documentation/development-process/6.Followthrough @@ -66,6 +66,11 @@ be easy to become blinded by your own solution to a problem to the point that you don't realize that something is fundamentally wrong or, perhaps, you're not even solving the right problem. +Andrew Morton has suggested that every review comment which does not result +in a code change should result in an additional code comment instead; that +can help future reviewers avoid the questions which came up the first time +around. + One fatal mistake is to ignore review comments in the hope that they will go away. They will not go away. If you repost code without having responded to the comments you got the time before, you're likely to find @@ -100,7 +105,7 @@ entry into a subsystem maintainer's tree. How that works varies from one subsystem to the next; each maintainer has his or her own way of doing things. In particular, there may be more than one tree - one, perhaps, dedicated to patches planned for the next merge window, and another for -longer-term work. +longer-term work. For patches applying to areas for which there is no obvious subsystem tree (memory management patches, for example), the default tree often ends up @@ -109,11 +114,10 @@ through the -mm tree. Inclusion into a subsystem tree can bring a higher level of visibility to a patch. Now other developers working with that tree will get the patch by -default. Subsystem trees typically feed into -mm and linux-next as well, -making their contents visible to the development community as a whole. At -this point, there's a good chance that you will get more comments from a -new set of reviewers; these comments need to be answered as in the previous -round. +default. Subsystem trees typically feed linux-next as well, making their +contents visible to the development community as a whole. At this point, +there's a good chance that you will get more comments from a new set of +reviewers; these comments need to be answered as in the previous round. What may also happen at this point, depending on the nature of your patch, is that conflicts with work being done by others turn up. In the worst diff --git a/Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics b/Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics index 837179447e17..26dc3fa196e4 100644 --- a/Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics +++ b/Documentation/development-process/7.AdvancedTopics @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ can affect your ability to get trees pulled in the future. Quoting Linus: to trust things *without* then having to go and check every individual change by hand. -(http://lwn.net/Articles/224135/). +(http://lwn.net/Articles/224135/). To avoid this kind of situation, ensure that all patches within a given branch stick closely to the associated topic; a "driver fixes" branch @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ When requesting a pull, be sure to give all the relevant information: where your tree is, what branch to pull, and what changes will result from the pull. The git request-pull command can be helpful in this regard; it will format the request as other developers expect, and will also check to be -sure that you have remembered to push those changes to the public server. +sure that you have remembered to push those changes to the public server. 7.2: REVIEWING PATCHES diff --git a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt index 7d00668e97bb..fb1d4a0cf122 100644 --- a/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt +++ b/Documentation/device-mapper/dm-service-time.txt @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Algorithm ========= dm-service-time adds the I/O size to 'in-flight-size' when the I/O is -dispatched and substracts when completed. +dispatched and subtracts when completed. Basically, dm-service-time selects a path having minimum service time which is calculated by: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/sm501fb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/sm501fb.txt index 7d319fba9b5b..9d9f0098092b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/sm501fb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/fb/sm501fb.txt @@ -18,9 +18,9 @@ Optional properties: - edid : verbatim EDID data block describing attached display. Data from the detailed timing descriptor will be used to program the display controller. -- little-endian: availiable on big endian systems, to +- little-endian: available on big endian systems, to set different foreign endian. -- big-endian: availiable on little endian systems, to +- big-endian: available on little endian systems, to set different foreign endian. Example for MPC5200: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt index a48b2cadc7f0..00f1f546b32e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mtd/fsl-upm-nand.txt @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Optional properties: - gpios : may specify optional GPIOs connected to the Ready-Not-Busy pins (R/B#). For multi-chip devices, "n" GPIO definitions are required according to the number of chips. -- chip-delay : chip dependent delay for transfering data from array to +- chip-delay : chip dependent delay for transferring data from array to read registers (tR). Required if property "gpios" is not used (R/B# pins not connected). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt new file mode 100755 index 000000000000..1a729f089866 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/fsl-flexcan.txt @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ +CAN Device Tree Bindings +------------------------ +2011 Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. + +fsl,flexcan-v1.0 nodes +----------------------- +In addition to the required compatible-, reg- and interrupt-properties, you can +also specify which clock source shall be used for the controller. + +CPI Clock- Can Protocol Interface Clock + This CLK_SRC bit of CTRL(control register) selects the clock source to + the CAN Protocol Interface(CPI) to be either the peripheral clock + (driven by the PLL) or the crystal oscillator clock. The selected clock + is the one fed to the prescaler to generate the Serial Clock (Sclock). + The PRESDIV field of CTRL(control register) controls a prescaler that + generates the Serial Clock (Sclock), whose period defines the + time quantum used to compose the CAN waveform. + +Can Engine Clock Source + There are two sources for CAN clock + - Platform Clock It represents the bus clock + - Oscillator Clock + + Peripheral Clock (PLL) + -------------- + | + --------- ------------- + | |CPI Clock | Prescaler | Sclock + | |---------------->| (1.. 256) |------------> + --------- ------------- + | | + -------------- ---------------------CLK_SRC + Oscillator Clock + +- fsl,flexcan-clock-source : CAN Engine Clock Source.This property selects + the peripheral clock. PLL clock is fed to the + prescaler to generate the Serial Clock (Sclock). + Valid values are "oscillator" and "platform" + "oscillator": CAN engine clock source is oscillator clock. + "platform" The CAN engine clock source is the bus clock + (platform clock). + +- fsl,flexcan-clock-divider : for the reference and system clock, an additional + clock divider can be specified. +- clock-frequency: frequency required to calculate the bitrate for FlexCAN. + +Note: + - v1.0 of flexcan-v1.0 represent the IP block version for P1010 SOC. + - P1010 does not have oscillator as the Clock Source.So the default + Clock Source is platform clock. +Examples: + + can0@1c000 { + compatible = "fsl,flexcan-v1.0"; + reg = <0x1c000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <48 0x2>; + interrupt-parent = <&mpic>; + fsl,flexcan-clock-source = "platform"; + fsl,flexcan-clock-divider = <2>; + clock-frequency = <fixed by u-boot>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt index d6d209ded937..c2dbcec0ee31 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/sja1000.txt @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Optional properties: - nxp,no-comparator-bypass : Allows to disable the CAN input comperator. -For futher information, please have a look to the SJA1000 data sheet. +For further information, please have a look to the SJA1000 data sheet. Examples: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..939a26d541f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/ifc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ +Integrated Flash Controller + +Properties: +- name : Should be ifc +- compatible : should contain "fsl,ifc". The version of the integrated + flash controller can be found in the IFC_REV register at + offset zero. + +- #address-cells : Should be either two or three. The first cell is the + chipselect number, and the remaining cells are the + offset into the chipselect. +- #size-cells : Either one or two, depending on how large each chipselect + can be. +- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device +- interrupts : IFC has two interrupts. The first one is the "common" + interrupt(CM_EVTER_STAT), and second is the NAND interrupt + (NAND_EVTER_STAT). + +- ranges : Each range corresponds to a single chipselect, and covers + the entire access window as configured. + +Child device nodes describe the devices connected to IFC such as NOR (e.g. +cfi-flash) and NAND (fsl,ifc-nand). There might be board specific devices +like FPGAs, CPLDs, etc. + +Example: + + ifc@ffe1e000 { + compatible = "fsl,ifc", "simple-bus"; + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <1>; + reg = <0x0 0xffe1e000 0 0x2000>; + interrupts = <16 2 19 2>; + + /* NOR, NAND Flashes and CPLD on board */ + ranges = <0x0 0x0 0x0 0xee000000 0x02000000 + 0x1 0x0 0x0 0xffa00000 0x00010000 + 0x3 0x0 0x0 0xffb00000 0x00020000>; + + flash@0,0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "cfi-flash"; + reg = <0x0 0x0 0x2000000>; + bank-width = <2>; + device-width = <1>; + + partition@0 { + /* 32MB for user data */ + reg = <0x0 0x02000000>; + label = "NOR Data"; + }; + }; + + flash@1,0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "fsl,ifc-nand"; + reg = <0x1 0x0 0x10000>; + + partition@0 { + /* This location must not be altered */ + /* 1MB for u-boot Bootloader Image */ + reg = <0x0 0x00100000>; + label = "NAND U-Boot Image"; + read-only; + }; + }; + + cpld@3,0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "fsl,p1010rdb-cpld"; + reg = <0x3 0x0 0x000001f>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic-timer.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic-timer.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..df41958140e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic-timer.txt @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ +* Freescale MPIC timers + +Required properties: +- compatible: "fsl,mpic-global-timer" + +- reg : Contains two regions. The first is the main timer register bank + (GTCCRxx, GTBCRxx, GTVPRxx, GTDRxx). The second is the timer control + register (TCRx) for the group. + +- fsl,available-ranges: use <start count> style section to define which + timer interrupts can be used. This property is optional; without this, + all timers within the group can be used. + +- interrupts: one interrupt per timer in the group, in order, starting + with timer zero. If timer-available-ranges is present, only the + interrupts that correspond to available timers shall be present. + +Example: + /* Note that this requires #interrupt-cells to be 4 */ + timer0: timer@41100 { + compatible = "fsl,mpic-global-timer"; + reg = <0x41100 0x100 0x41300 4>; + + /* Another AMP partition is using timers 0 and 1 */ + fsl,available-ranges = <2 2>; + + interrupts = <2 0 3 0 + 3 0 3 0>; + }; + + timer1: timer@42100 { + compatible = "fsl,mpic-global-timer"; + reg = <0x42100 0x100 0x42300 4>; + interrupts = <4 0 3 0 + 5 0 3 0 + 6 0 3 0 + 7 0 3 0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt index 8aa10f45ebe6..2cf38bd841fd 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/powerpc/fsl/mpic.txt @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ EXAMPLE 4 */ timer0: timer@41100 { compatible = "fsl,mpic-global-timer"; - reg = <0x41100 0x100>; + reg = <0x41100 0x100 0x41300 4>; interrupts = <0 0 3 0 1 0 3 0 2 0 3 0 @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ EXAMPLE 4 EXAMPLE 5 /* - * Definition of an error interrupt (interupt type 1). + * Definition of an error interrupt (interrupt type 1). * SoC interrupt number is 16 and the specific error * interrupt bit in the error interrupt summary register * is 23. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt index 55fd2623445b..50619a0720a8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ and properties to be present. This will be described in detail in section III, but, for example, the kernel does not require you to create a node for every PCI device in the system. It is a requirement to have a node for PCI host bridges in order to provide interrupt -routing informations and memory/IO ranges, among others. It is also +routing information and memory/IO ranges, among others. It is also recommended to define nodes for on chip devices and other buses that don't specifically fit in an existing OF specification. This creates a great flexibility in the way the kernel can then probe those and match @@ -385,7 +385,7 @@ struct boot_param_header { among others, by kexec. If you are on an SMP system, this value should match the content of the "reg" property of the CPU node in the device-tree corresponding to the CPU calling the kernel entry - point (see further chapters for more informations on the required + point (see further chapters for more information on the required device-tree contents) - size_dt_strings @@ -553,7 +553,7 @@ looks like in practice. This tree is almost a minimal tree. It pretty much contains the minimal set of required nodes and properties to boot a linux kernel; -that is, some basic model informations at the root, the CPUs, and the +that is, some basic model information at the root, the CPUs, and the physical memory layout. It also includes misc information passed through /chosen, like in this example, the platform type (mandatory) and the kernel command line arguments (optional). diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt index 5001b7511626..6754b2df8aa1 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt @@ -3,24 +3,7 @@ Bus Types Definition ~~~~~~~~~~ - -struct bus_type { - char * name; - - struct subsystem subsys; - struct kset drivers; - struct kset devices; - - struct bus_attribute * bus_attrs; - struct device_attribute * dev_attrs; - struct driver_attribute * drv_attrs; - - int (*match)(struct device * dev, struct device_driver * drv); - int (*hotplug) (struct device *dev, char **envp, - int num_envp, char *buffer, int buffer_size); - int (*suspend)(struct device * dev, pm_message_t state); - int (*resume)(struct device * dev); -}; +See the kerneldoc for the struct bus_type. int bus_register(struct bus_type * bus); diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt index 548505f14aa4..1fefc480a80b 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt @@ -27,22 +27,7 @@ The device class structure looks like: typedef int (*devclass_add)(struct device *); typedef void (*devclass_remove)(struct device *); -struct device_class { - char * name; - rwlock_t lock; - u32 devnum; - struct list_head node; - - struct list_head drivers; - struct list_head intf_list; - - struct driver_dir_entry dir; - struct driver_dir_entry device_dir; - struct driver_dir_entry driver_dir; - - devclass_add add_device; - devclass_remove remove_device; -}; +See the kerneldoc for the struct class. A typical device class definition would look like: diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt index a124f3126b0d..b2ff42685bcb 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt @@ -2,96 +2,7 @@ The Basic Device Structure ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -struct device { - struct list_head g_list; - struct list_head node; - struct list_head bus_list; - struct list_head driver_list; - struct list_head intf_list; - struct list_head children; - struct device * parent; - - char name[DEVICE_NAME_SIZE]; - char bus_id[BUS_ID_SIZE]; - - spinlock_t lock; - atomic_t refcount; - - struct bus_type * bus; - struct driver_dir_entry dir; - - u32 class_num; - - struct device_driver *driver; - void *driver_data; - void *platform_data; - - u32 current_state; - unsigned char *saved_state; - - void (*release)(struct device * dev); -}; - -Fields -~~~~~~ -g_list: Node in the global device list. - -node: Node in device's parent's children list. - -bus_list: Node in device's bus's devices list. - -driver_list: Node in device's driver's devices list. - -intf_list: List of intf_data. There is one structure allocated for - each interface that the device supports. - -children: List of child devices. - -parent: *** FIXME *** - -name: ASCII description of device. - Example: " 3Com Corporation 3c905 100BaseTX [Boomerang]" - -bus_id: ASCII representation of device's bus position. This - field should be a name unique across all devices on the - bus type the device belongs to. - - Example: PCI bus_ids are in the form of - <bus number>:<slot number>.<function number> - This name is unique across all PCI devices in the system. - -lock: Spinlock for the device. - -refcount: Reference count on the device. - -bus: Pointer to struct bus_type that device belongs to. - -dir: Device's sysfs directory. - -class_num: Class-enumerated value of the device. - -driver: Pointer to struct device_driver that controls the device. - -driver_data: Driver-specific data. - -platform_data: Platform data specific to the device. - - Example: for devices on custom boards, as typical of embedded - and SOC based hardware, Linux often uses platform_data to point - to board-specific structures describing devices and how they - are wired. That can include what ports are available, chip - variants, which GPIO pins act in what additional roles, and so - on. This shrinks the "Board Support Packages" (BSPs) and - minimizes board-specific #ifdefs in drivers. - -current_state: Current power state of the device. - -saved_state: Pointer to saved state of the device. This is usable by - the device driver controlling the device. - -release: Callback to free the device after all references have - gone away. This should be set by the allocator of the - device (i.e. the bus driver that discovered the device). +See the kerneldoc for the struct device. Programming Interface diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt index d2cd6fb8ba9e..4421135826a2 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt +++ b/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt @@ -1,23 +1,7 @@ Device Drivers -struct device_driver { - char * name; - struct bus_type * bus; - - struct completion unloaded; - struct kobject kobj; - list_t devices; - - struct module *owner; - - int (*probe) (struct device * dev); - int (*remove) (struct device * dev); - - int (*suspend) (struct device * dev, pm_message_t state); - int (*resume) (struct device * dev); -}; - +See the kerneldoc for the struct device_driver. Allocation diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb b/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb index c8238e44ed6b..c4d963a67d6f 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb +++ b/Documentation/dvb/README.dvb-usb @@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ Hotplug is able to load the driver, when it is needed (because you plugged in the device). If you want to enable debug output, you have to load the driver manually and -from withing the dvb-kernel cvs repository. +from within the dvb-kernel cvs repository. first have a look, which debug level are available: diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/ci.txt b/Documentation/dvb/ci.txt index 4a0c2b56e690..6c3bda50f7dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/ci.txt +++ b/Documentation/dvb/ci.txt @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ so on. * CI modules that are supported ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ -The CI module support is largely dependant upon the firmware on the cards +The CI module support is largely dependent upon the firmware on the cards Some cards do support almost all of the available CI modules. There is nothing much that can be done in order to make additional CI modules working with these cards. diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/faq.txt b/Documentation/dvb/faq.txt index 121832e5d899..97b1373f2428 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/faq.txt +++ b/Documentation/dvb/faq.txt @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Some very frequently asked questions about linuxtv-dvb 5. The dvb_net device doesn't give me any packets at all Run tcpdump on the dvb0_0 interface. This sets the interface - into promiscous mode so it accepts any packets from the PID + into promiscuous mode so it accepts any packets from the PID you have configured with the dvbnet utility. Check if there are any packets with the IP addr and MAC addr you have configured with ifconfig. diff --git a/Documentation/dvb/udev.txt b/Documentation/dvb/udev.txt index 68ee224b6aae..412305b7c557 100644 --- a/Documentation/dvb/udev.txt +++ b/Documentation/dvb/udev.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ The DVB subsystem currently registers to the sysfs subsystem using the "class_simple" interface. -This means that only the basic informations like module loading parameters +This means that only the basic information like module loading parameters are presented through sysfs. Other things that might be interesting are currently *not* available. diff --git a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt index e6c4b757025b..f959909d7154 100644 --- a/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt +++ b/Documentation/dynamic-debug-howto.txt @@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ This document describes how to use the dynamic debug (ddebug) feature. Dynamic debug is designed to allow you to dynamically enable/disable kernel code to obtain additional kernel information. Currently, if -CONFIG_DYNAMIC_DEBUG is set, then all pr_debug()/dev_debug() calls can be +CONFIG_DYNAMIC_DEBUG is set, then all pr_debug()/dev_dbg() calls can be dynamically enabled per-callsite. Dynamic debug has even more useful features: @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Dynamic debug has even more useful features: Controlling dynamic debug Behaviour =================================== -The behaviour of pr_debug()/dev_debug()s are controlled via writing to a +The behaviour of pr_debug()/dev_dbg()s are controlled via writing to a control file in the 'debugfs' filesystem. Thus, you must first mount the debugfs filesystem, in order to make use of this feature. Subsequently, we refer to the control file as: <debugfs>/dynamic_debug/control. For example, if you want to diff --git a/Documentation/edac.txt b/Documentation/edac.txt index 9ee774de57cd..249822cde82b 100644 --- a/Documentation/edac.txt +++ b/Documentation/edac.txt @@ -311,7 +311,7 @@ Total Correctable Errors count attribute file: 'ce_noinfo_count' This attribute file displays the number of CEs that - have occurred wherewith no informations as to which DIMM slot + have occurred wherewith no information as to which DIMM slot is having errors. Memory is handicapped, but operational, yet no information is available to indicate which slot the failing memory is in. This count field should be also @@ -741,7 +741,7 @@ were done at i7core_edac driver. This chapter will cover those differences As EDAC API maps the minimum unity is csrows, the driver sequencially maps channel/dimm into different csrows. - For example, suposing the following layout: + For example, supposing the following layout: Ch0 phy rd0, wr0 (0x063f4031): 2 ranks, UDIMMs dimm 0 1024 Mb offset: 0, bank: 8, rank: 1, row: 0x4000, col: 0x400 dimm 1 1024 Mb offset: 4, bank: 8, rank: 1, row: 0x4000, col: 0x400 diff --git a/Documentation/eisa.txt b/Documentation/eisa.txt index f297fc1202ae..38cf0c7b559f 100644 --- a/Documentation/eisa.txt +++ b/Documentation/eisa.txt @@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ struct eisa_driver { id_table : an array of NULL terminated EISA id strings, followed by an empty string. Each string can - optionally be paired with a driver-dependant value + optionally be paired with a driver-dependent value (driver_data). driver : a generic driver, such as described in diff --git a/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt index 1a2e8aa3fbb1..444e34b52ae1 100644 --- a/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt +++ b/Documentation/fb/viafb.txt @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Notes: supported_output_devices - This read-only file contains a full ',' seperated list containing all + This read-only file contains a full ',' separated list containing all output devices that could be available on your platform. It is likely that not all of those have a connector on your hardware but it should provide a good starting point to figure out which of those names match @@ -225,7 +225,7 @@ Notes: This can happen for example if only one (the other) iga is used. Writing to these files allows adjusting the output devices during runtime. One can add new devices, remove existing ones or switch - between igas. Essentially you can write a ',' seperated list of device + between igas. Essentially you can write a ',' separated list of device names (or a single one) in the same format as the output to those files. You can add a '+' or '-' as a prefix allowing simple addition and removal of devices. So a prefix '+' adds the devices from your list diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt index 274b32d12532..4cba260e3059 100644 --- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt +++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt @@ -35,17 +35,6 @@ Who: Luis R. Rodriguez <lrodriguez@atheros.com> --------------------------- -What: AR9170USB -When: 2.6.40 - -Why: This driver is deprecated and the firmware is no longer - maintained. The replacement driver "carl9170" has been - around for a while, so the devices are still supported. - -Who: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com> - ---------------------------- - What: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM Check: IRQF_SAMPLE_RANDOM When: July 2009 @@ -387,26 +376,6 @@ Who: Tejun Heo <tj@kernel.org> ---------------------------- -What: Support for lcd_switch and display_get in asus-laptop driver -When: March 2010 -Why: These two features use non-standard interfaces. There are the - only features that really need multiple path to guess what's - the right method name on a specific laptop. - - Removing them will allow to remove a lot of code an significantly - clean the drivers. - - This will affect the backlight code which won't be able to know - if the backlight is on or off. The platform display file will also be - write only (like the one in eeepc-laptop). - - This should'nt affect a lot of user because they usually know - when their display is on or off. - -Who: Corentin Chary <corentin.chary@gmail.com> - ----------------------------- - What: sysfs-class-rfkill state file When: Feb 2014 Files: net/rfkill/core.c @@ -425,16 +394,6 @@ Who: anybody or Florian Mickler <florian@mickler.org> ---------------------------- -What: capifs -When: February 2011 -Files: drivers/isdn/capi/capifs.* -Why: udev fully replaces this special file system that only contains CAPI - NCCI TTY device nodes. User space (pppdcapiplugin) works without - noticing the difference. -Who: Jan Kiszka <jan.kiszka@web.de> - ----------------------------- - What: KVM paravirt mmu host support When: January 2011 Why: The paravirt mmu host support is slower than non-paravirt mmu, both @@ -480,14 +439,6 @@ Who: Thomas Gleixner <tglx@linutronix.de> ---------------------------- -What: The acpi_sleep=s4_nonvs command line option -When: 2.6.37 -Files: arch/x86/kernel/acpi/sleep.c -Why: superseded by acpi_sleep=nonvs -Who: Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl> - ----------------------------- - What: PCI DMA unmap state API When: August 2012 Why: PCI DMA unmap state API (include/linux/pci-dma.h) was replaced diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt index 51986bf08a4d..4c95935cbcf4 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/autofs4-mount-control.txt @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call. AUTOFS_DEV_IOCTL_TIMEOUT_CMD ---------------------------- -Set the expire timeout for mounts withing an autofs mount point. +Set the expire timeout for mounts within an autofs mount point. The call requires an initialized struct autofs_dev_ioctl with the ioctlfd field set to the descriptor obtained from the open call. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt index 1902c57b72ef..a167ab876c35 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/caching/netfs-api.txt @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ restraints as possible on how an index is structured and where it is placed in the tree. The netfs can even mix indices and data files at the same level, but it's not recommended. -Each index entry consists of a key of indeterminate length plus some auxilliary +Each index entry consists of a key of indeterminate length plus some auxiliary data, also of indeterminate length. There are some limits on indices: @@ -203,23 +203,23 @@ This has the following fields: If the function is absent, a file size of 0 is assumed. - (6) A function to retrieve auxilliary data from the netfs [optional]. + (6) A function to retrieve auxiliary data from the netfs [optional]. This function will be called with the netfs data that was passed to the - cookie acquisition function and the maximum length of auxilliary data that - it may provide. It should write the auxilliary data into the given buffer + cookie acquisition function and the maximum length of auxiliary data that + it may provide. It should write the auxiliary data into the given buffer and return the quantity it wrote. - If this function is absent, the auxilliary data length will be set to 0. + If this function is absent, the auxiliary data length will be set to 0. - The length of the auxilliary data buffer may be dependent on the key + The length of the auxiliary data buffer may be dependent on the key length. A netfs mustn't rely on being able to provide more than 400 bytes for both. - (7) A function to check the auxilliary data [optional]. + (7) A function to check the auxiliary data [optional]. This function will be called to check that a match found in the cache for - this object is valid. For instance with AFS it could check the auxilliary + this object is valid. For instance with AFS it could check the auxiliary data against the data version number returned by the server to determine whether the index entry in a cache is still valid. @@ -232,7 +232,7 @@ This has the following fields: (*) FSCACHE_CHECKAUX_NEEDS_UPDATE - the entry requires update (*) FSCACHE_CHECKAUX_OBSOLETE - the entry should be deleted - This function can also be used to extract data from the auxilliary data in + This function can also be used to extract data from the auxiliary data in the cache and copy it into the netfs's structures. (8) A pair of functions to manage contexts for the completion callback diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt index fabcb0e00f25..dd57bb6bb390 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt @@ -409,7 +409,7 @@ As a consequence of this, default_groups cannot be removed directly via rmdir(2). They also are not considered when rmdir(2) on the parent group is checking for children. -[Dependant Subsystems] +[Dependent Subsystems] Sometimes other drivers depend on particular configfs items. For example, ocfs2 mounts depend on a heartbeat region item. If that diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt index 6b050464a90d..c79ec58fd7f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ext4.txt @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ Note: More extensive information for getting started with ext4 can be * Inode allocation using large virtual block groups via flex_bg * delayed allocation * large block (up to pagesize) support -* efficent new ordered mode in JBD2 and ext4(avoid using buffer head to force +* efficient new ordered mode in JBD2 and ext4(avoid using buffer head to force the ordering) [1] Filesystems with a block size of 1k may see a limit imposed by the @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ directory hash tree having a maximum depth of two. 2.2 Candidate features for future inclusion * Online defrag (patches available but not well tested) -* reduced mke2fs time via lazy itable initialization in conjuction with +* reduced mke2fs time via lazy itable initialization in conjunction with the uninit_bg feature (capability to do this is available in e2fsprogs but a kernel thread to do lazy zeroing of unused inode table blocks after filesystem is first mounted is required for safety) diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.txt index fd966dc9979a..d81889669293 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2-uevents.txt @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ be fixed. The REMOVE uevent is generated at the end of an unsuccessful mount or at the end of a umount of the filesystem. All REMOVE uevents will -have been preceeded by at least an ADD uevent for the same fileystem, +have been preceded by at least an ADD uevent for the same fileystem, and unlike the other uevents is generated automatically by the kernel's kobject subsystem. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt index 0b59c0200912..4cda926628aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/gfs2.txt @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ their I/O so file system consistency is maintained. One of the nifty features of GFS is perfect consistency -- changes made to the file system on one machine show up immediately on all other machines in the cluster. -GFS uses interchangable inter-node locking mechanisms, the currently +GFS uses interchangeable inter-node locking mechanisms, the currently supported mechanisms are: lock_nolock -- allows gfs to be used as a local file system diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt index 933bc66ccff1..791af8dac065 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ntfs.txt @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ Note the "Should sync?" parameter "nosync" means that the two mirrors are already in sync which will be the case on a clean shutdown of Windows. If the mirrors are not clean, you can specify the "sync" option instead of "nosync" and the Device-Mapper driver will then copy the entirety of the "Source Device" -to the "Target Device" or if you specified multipled target devices to all of +to the "Target Device" or if you specified multiple target devices to all of them. Once you have your table, save it in a file somewhere (e.g. /etc/ntfsvolume1), diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt index 5393e6611691..9ed920a8cd79 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ocfs2.txt @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ user_xattr (*) Enables Extended User Attributes. nouser_xattr Disables Extended User Attributes. acl Enables POSIX Access Control Lists support. noacl (*) Disables POSIX Access Control Lists support. -resv_level=2 (*) Set how agressive allocation reservations will be. +resv_level=2 (*) Set how aggressive allocation reservations will be. Valid values are between 0 (reservations off) to 8 (maximum space for reservations). dir_resv_level= (*) By default, directory reservations will scale with file diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt index eb59c8b44be9..3571667c7105 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.txt @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ Path walking overview A name string specifies a start (root directory, cwd, fd-relative) and a sequence of elements (directory entry names), which together refer to a path in the namespace. A path is represented as a (dentry, vfsmount) tuple. The name -elements are sub-strings, seperated by '/'. +elements are sub-strings, separated by '/'. Name lookups will want to find a particular path that a name string refers to (usually the final element, or parent of final element). This is done by taking @@ -354,7 +354,7 @@ vfstest 24185492 4945 708725(2.9%) 1076136(4.4%) 0 2651 What this shows is that failed rcu-walk lookups, ie. ones that are restarted entirely with ref-walk, are quite rare. Even the "vfstest" case which -specifically has concurrent renames/mkdir/rmdir/ creat/unlink/etc to excercise +specifically has concurrent renames/mkdir/rmdir/ creat/unlink/etc to exercise such races is not showing a huge amount of restarts. Dropping from rcu-walk to ref-walk mean that we have encountered a dentry where diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/network_protocol.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/network_protocol.txt index 40ea6c295afb..65e03dd44823 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/network_protocol.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/pohmelfs/network_protocol.txt @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Commands can be embedded into transaction command (which in turn has own command so one can extend protocol as needed without breaking backward compatibility as long as old commands are supported. All string lengths include tail 0 byte. -All commans are transfered over the network in big-endian. CPU endianess is used at the end peers. +All commands are transferred over the network in big-endian. CPU endianess is used at the end peers. @cmd - command number, which specifies command to be processed. Following commands are used currently: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt index 23cae6548d3a..60740e8ecb37 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt @@ -543,7 +543,7 @@ just those considered 'most important'. The new vectors are: their statistics are used by kernel developers and interested users to determine the occurrence of interrupts of the given type. -The above IRQ vectors are displayed only when relevent. For example, +The above IRQ vectors are displayed only when relevant. For example, the threshold vector does not exist on x86_64 platforms. Others are suppressed when the system is a uniprocessor. As of this writing, only i386 and x86_64 platforms support the new IRQ vector displays. @@ -836,7 +836,6 @@ Provides counts of softirq handlers serviced since boot time, for each cpu. TASKLET: 0 0 0 290 SCHED: 27035 26983 26971 26746 HRTIMER: 0 0 0 0 - RCU: 1678 1769 2178 2250 1.3 IDE devices in /proc/ide @@ -1202,7 +1201,7 @@ The columns are: W = can do write operations U = can do unblank flags E = it is enabled - C = it is prefered console + C = it is preferred console B = it is primary boot console p = it is used for printk buffer b = it is not a TTY but a Braille device @@ -1331,7 +1330,7 @@ NOTICE: /proc/<pid>/oom_adj is deprecated and will be removed, please see Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt. Caveat: when a parent task is selected, the oom killer will sacrifice any first -generation children with seperate address spaces instead, if possible. This +generation children with separate address spaces instead, if possible. This avoids servers and important system daemons from being killed and loses the minimal amount of work. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt index 2d78f1911844..d4d41465a0b1 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/squashfs.txt @@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ or if it is stored out of line (in which case the value field stores a reference to where the actual value is stored). This allows large values to be stored out of line improving scanning and lookup performance and it also allows values to be de-duplicated, the value being stored once, and -all other occurences holding an out of line reference to that value. +all other occurrences holding an out of line reference to that value. The xattr lists are packed into compressed 8K metadata blocks. To reduce overhead in inodes, rather than storing the on-disk diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt index f806e50aaa63..597f728e7b4e 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ values of the same type. Mixing types, expressing multiple lines of data, and doing fancy formatting of data is heavily frowned upon. Doing these things may get -you publically humiliated and your code rewritten without notice. +you publicly humiliated and your code rewritten without notice. An attribute definition is simply: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt index 80815ed654cb..21a7dc467bba 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ functions: The passed struct file_system_type describes your filesystem. When a request is made to mount a filesystem onto a directory in your namespace, the VFS will call the appropriate mount() method for the specific -filesystem. New vfsmount refering to the tree returned by ->mount() +filesystem. New vfsmount referring to the tree returned by ->mount() will be attached to the mountpoint, so that when pathname resolution reaches the mountpoint it will jump into the root of that vfsmount. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt index 5282e3e51413..2ce36439c09f 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/xfs-delayed-logging-design.txt @@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ the aggregation of all the previous changes currently held only in the log. This relogging technique also allows objects to be moved forward in the log so that an object being relogged does not prevent the tail of the log from ever moving forward. This can be seen in the table above by the changing -(increasing) LSN of each subsquent transaction - the LSN is effectively a +(increasing) LSN of each subsequent transaction - the LSN is effectively a direct encoding of the location in the log of the transaction. This relogging is also used to implement long-running, multiple-commit @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ the same time another transaction modifies the item and inserts the log item into the new CIL, then checkpoint transaction commit code cannot use log items to store the list of log vectors that need to be written into the transaction. Hence log vectors need to be able to be chained together to allow them to be -detatched from the log items. That is, when the CIL is flushed the memory +detached from the log items. That is, when the CIL is flushed the memory buffer and log vector attached to each log item needs to be attached to the checkpoint context so that the log item can be released. In diagrammatic form, the CIL would look like this before the flush: @@ -577,7 +577,7 @@ only becomes unpinned when all the transactions complete and there are no pending transactions. Thus the pinning and unpinning of a log item is symmetric as there is a 1:1 relationship with transaction commit and log item completion. -For delayed logging, however, we have an assymetric transaction commit to +For delayed logging, however, we have an asymmetric transaction commit to completion relationship. Every time an object is relogged in the CIL it goes through the commit process without a corresponding completion being registered. That is, we now have a many-to-one relationship between transaction commit and @@ -780,7 +780,7 @@ With delayed logging, there are new steps inserted into the life cycle: From this, it can be seen that the only life cycle differences between the two logging methods are in the middle of the life cycle - they still have the same beginning and end and execution constraints. The only differences are in the -commiting of the log items to the log itself and the completion processing. +committing of the log items to the log itself and the completion processing. Hence delayed logging should not introduce any constraints on log item behaviour, allocation or freeing that don't already exist. diff --git a/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt b/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt index cb8a3a00cc92..df904aec9904 100644 --- a/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt +++ b/Documentation/flexible-arrays.txt @@ -66,10 +66,10 @@ trick is to ensure that any needed memory allocations are done before entering atomic context, using: int flex_array_prealloc(struct flex_array *array, unsigned int start, - unsigned int end, gfp_t flags); + unsigned int nr_elements, gfp_t flags); This function will ensure that memory for the elements indexed in the range -defined by start and end has been allocated. Thereafter, a +defined by start and nr_elements has been allocated. Thereafter, a flex_array_put() call on an element in that range is guaranteed not to block. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru index 5eb3b9d5f0d5..915f32063a26 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ motherboards (most modern Abit motherboards). The first and second revision of the uGuru chip in reality is a Winbond W83L950D in disguise (despite Abit claiming it is "a new microprocessor -designed by the ABIT Engineers"). Unfortunatly this doesn't help since the +designed by the ABIT Engineers"). Unfortunately this doesn't help since the W83L950D is a generic microcontroller with a custom Abit application running on it. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet index d9251efdcec7..8d2be8a0b1e3 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru-datasheet @@ -5,9 +5,9 @@ First of all, what I know about uGuru is no fact based on any help, hints or datasheet from Abit. The data I have got on uGuru have I assembled through my weak knowledge in "backwards engineering". And just for the record, you may have noticed uGuru isn't a chip developed by -Abit, as they claim it to be. It's realy just an microprocessor (uC) created by +Abit, as they claim it to be. It's really just an microprocessor (uC) created by Winbond (W83L950D). And no, reading the manual for this specific uC or -mailing Windbond for help won't give any usefull data about uGuru, as it is +mailing Windbond for help won't give any useful data about uGuru, as it is the program inside the uC that is responding to calls. Olle Sandberg <ollebull@gmail.com>, 2005-05-25 @@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ later on attached again data-port will hold 0x08, more about this later. After wider testing of the Linux kernel driver some variants of the uGuru have turned up which will hold 0x00 instead of 0xAC at the CMD port, thus we also -have to test CMD for two different values. On these uGuru's DATA will initally +have to test CMD for two different values. On these uGuru's DATA will initially hold 0x09 and will only hold 0x08 after reading CMD first, so CMD must be read first! @@ -308,5 +308,5 @@ the voltage / clock programming out, I tried reading and only reading banks resulted in a _permanent_ reprogramming of the voltages, luckily I had the sensors part configured so that it would shutdown my system on any out of spec voltages which proprably safed my computer (after a reboot I managed to -immediatly enter the bios and reload the defaults). This probably means that +immediately enter the bios and reload the defaults). This probably means that the read/write cycle for the non sensor part is different from the sensor part. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru3 b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru3 index fa598aac22fa..a6ccfe4bb6aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru3 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/abituguru3 @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ This driver supports the hardware monitoring features of the third revision of the Abit uGuru chip, found on recent Abit uGuru featuring motherboards. The 3rd revision of the uGuru chip in reality is a Winbond W83L951G. -Unfortunatly this doesn't help since the W83L951G is a generic microcontroller +Unfortunately this doesn't help since the W83L951G is a generic microcontroller with a custom Abit application running on it. Despite Abit not releasing any information regarding the uGuru revision 3, diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1021 b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1021 index 03d02bfb3df1..02ad96cf9b2b 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1021 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1021 @@ -14,10 +14,6 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'gl523sm' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e Datasheet: - * Intel Xeon Processor - Prefix: - any other - may require 'force_adm1021' parameter - Addresses scanned: none - Datasheet: Publicly available at Intel website * Maxim MAX1617 Prefix: 'max1617' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x18 - 0x1a, 0x29 - 0x2b, 0x4c - 0x4e @@ -91,21 +87,27 @@ will do no harm, but will return 'old' values. It is possible to make ADM1021-clones do faster measurements, but there is really no good reason for that. -Xeon support ------------- -Some Xeon processors have real max1617, adm1021, or compatible chips -within them, with two temperature sensors. +Netburst-based Xeon support +--------------------------- -Other Xeons have chips with only one sensor. +Some Xeon processors based on the Netburst (early Pentium 4, from 2001 to +2003) microarchitecture had real MAX1617, ADM1021, or compatible chips +within them, with two temperature sensors. Other Xeon processors of this +era (with 400 MHz FSB) had chips with only one temperature sensor. -If you have a Xeon, and the adm1021 module loads, and both temperatures -appear valid, then things are good. +If you have such an old Xeon, and you get two valid temperatures when +loading the adm1021 module, then things are good. -If the adm1021 module doesn't load, you should try this: - modprobe adm1021 force_adm1021=BUS,ADDRESS - ADDRESS can only be 0x18, 0x1a, 0x29, 0x2b, 0x4c, or 0x4e. +If nothing happens when loading the adm1021 module, and you are certain +that your specific Xeon processor model includes compatible sensors, you +will have to explicitly instantiate the sensor chips from user-space. See +method 4 in Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices. Possible slave +addresses are 0x18, 0x1a, 0x29, 0x2b, 0x4c, or 0x4e. It is likely that +only temp2 will be correct and temp1 will have to be ignored. -If you have dual Xeons you may have appear to have two separate -adm1021-compatible chips, or two single-temperature sensors, at distinct -addresses. +Previous generations of the Xeon processor (based on Pentium II/III) +didn't have these sensors. Next generations of Xeon processors (533 MHz +FSB and faster) lost them, until the Core-based generation which +introduced integrated digital thermal sensors. These are supported by +the coretemp driver. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg index 4d0bc70f1852..df02245d1419 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/f71882fg @@ -2,6 +2,10 @@ Kernel driver f71882fg ====================== Supported chips: + * Fintek F71808E + Prefix: 'f71808e' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Not public * Fintek F71858FG Prefix: 'f71858fg' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space @@ -26,10 +30,25 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'f71889ed' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space Datasheet: Should become available on the Fintek website soon + * Fintek F71889A + Prefix: 'f71889a' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Should become available on the Fintek website soon * Fintek F8000 Prefix: 'f8000' Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space Datasheet: Not public + * Fintek F81801U + Prefix: 'f71889fg' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Not public + Note: This is the 64-pin variant of the F71889FG, they have the + same device ID and are fully compatible as far as hardware + monitoring is concerned. + * Fintek F81865F + Prefix: 'f81865f' + Addresses scanned: none, address read from Super I/O config space + Datasheet: Available from the Fintek website Author: Hans de Goede <hdegoede@redhat.com> diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 index fa475c0a48a3..f3efd18e87f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/lm90 @@ -32,6 +32,16 @@ Supported chips: Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7461 + * Analog Devices ADT7461A + Prefix: 'adt7461a' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d + Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website + http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=ADT7461A + * ON Semiconductor NCT1008 + Prefix: 'nct1008' + Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4c and 0x4d + Datasheet: Publicly available at the ON Semiconductor website + http://www.onsemi.com/PowerSolutions/product.do?id=NCT1008 * Maxim MAX6646 Prefix: 'max6646' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x4d @@ -149,7 +159,7 @@ ADM1032: * ALERT is triggered by open remote sensor. * SMBus PEC support for Write Byte and Receive Byte transactions. -ADT7461: +ADT7461, ADT7461A, NCT1008: * Extended temperature range (breaks compatibility) * Lower resolution for remote temperature @@ -195,9 +205,9 @@ are exported, one for each channel, but these values are of course linked. Only the local hysteresis can be set from user-space, and the same delta applies to the remote hysteresis. -The lm90 driver will not update its values more frequently than every -other second; reading them more often will do no harm, but will return -'old' values. +The lm90 driver will not update its values more frequently than configured with +the update_interval attribute; reading them more often will do no harm, but will +return 'old' values. SMBus Alert Support ------------------- @@ -205,11 +215,12 @@ SMBus Alert Support This driver has basic support for SMBus alert. When an alert is received, the status register is read and the faulty temperature channel is logged. -The Analog Devices chips (ADM1032 and ADT7461) do not implement the SMBus -alert protocol properly so additional care is needed: the ALERT output is -disabled when an alert is received, and is re-enabled only when the alarm -is gone. Otherwise the chip would block alerts from other chips in the bus -as long as the alarm is active. +The Analog Devices chips (ADM1032, ADT7461 and ADT7461A) and ON +Semiconductor chips (NCT1008) do not implement the SMBus alert protocol +properly so additional care is needed: the ALERT output is disabled when +an alert is received, and is re-enabled only when the alarm is gone. +Otherwise the chip would block alerts from other chips in the bus as long +as the alarm is active. PEC Support ----------- diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max16064 b/Documentation/hwmon/max16064 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..41728999e142 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max16064 @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +Kernel driver max16064 +====================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim MAX16064 + Prefix: 'max16064' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16064.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports hardware montoring for Maxim MAX16064 Quad Power-Supply +Controller with Active-Voltage Output Control and PMBus Interface. + +The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. +Please see Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +in[1-4]_label "vout[1-4]" +in[1-4]_input Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register. +in[1-4]_min Minumum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in[1-4]_max Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in[1-4]_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in[1-4]_crit Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in[1-4]_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. +in[1-4]_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. +in[1-4]_lcrit_alarm Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status. +in[1-4]_crit_alarm Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status. + +temp1_input Measured temperature. From READ_TEMPERATURE_1 register. +temp1_max Maximum temperature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. +temp1_crit Critical high temperature. From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register. +temp1_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_1 with OT_WARN_LIMIT if TEMP_OT_WARNING + status is set. +temp1_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_1 with OT_FAULT_LIMIT if TEMP_OT_FAULT + status is set. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max34440 b/Documentation/hwmon/max34440 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6c525dd07d59 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max34440 @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ +Kernel driver max34440 +====================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim MAX34440 + Prefixes: 'max34440' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34440.pdf + * Maxim MAX34441 + PMBus 5-Channel Power-Supply Manager and Intelligent Fan Controller + Prefixes: 'max34441' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34441.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports hardware montoring for Maxim MAX34440 PMBus 6-Channel +Power-Supply Manager and MAX34441 PMBus 5-Channel Power-Supply Manager +and Intelligent Fan Controller. + +The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see +Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +in[1-6]_label "vout[1-6]". +in[1-6]_input Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register. +in[1-6]_min Minumum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in[1-6]_max Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in[1-6]_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in[1-6]_crit Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in[1-6]_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. +in[1-6]_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. +in[1-6]_lcrit_alarm Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status. +in[1-6]_crit_alarm Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status. + +curr[1-6]_label "iout[1-6]". +curr[1-6]_input Measured current. From READ_IOUT register. +curr[1-6]_max Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +curr[1-6]_crit Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register. +curr[1-6]_max_alarm Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARNING status. +curr[1-6]_crit_alarm Current critical high alarm. From IOUT_OC_FAULT status. + + in6 and curr6 attributes only exist for MAX34440. + +temp[1-8]_input Measured temperatures. From READ_TEMPERATURE_1 register. + temp1 is the chip's internal temperature. temp2..temp5 + are remote I2C temperature sensors. For MAX34441, temp6 + is a remote thermal-diode sensor. For MAX34440, temp6..8 + are remote I2C temperature sensors. +temp[1-8]_max Maximum temperature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. +temp[1-8]_crit Critical high temperature. From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register. +temp[1-8]_max_alarm Temperature high alarm. +temp[1-8]_crit_alarm Temperature critical high alarm. + + temp7 and temp8 attributes only exist for MAX34440. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max8688 b/Documentation/hwmon/max8688 new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0ddd3a412030 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max8688 @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +Kernel driver max8688 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Maxim MAX8688 + Prefix: 'max8688' + Addresses scanned: - + Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX8688.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <guenter.roeck@ericsson.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports hardware montoring for Maxim MAX8688 Digital Power-Supply +Controller/Monitor with PMBus Interface. + +The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. Please see +Documentation/hwmon/pmbus for details on PMBus client drivers. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + + +Platform data support +--------------------- + +The driver supports standard PMBus driver platform data. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other +attributes are read-only. + +in1_label "vout1" +in1_input Measured voltage. From READ_VOUT register. +in1_min Minumum Voltage. From VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in1_max Maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. +in1_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in1_crit Critical maximum voltage. From VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. +in1_min_alarm Voltage low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_WARNING status. +in1_max_alarm Voltage high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_WARNING status. +in1_lcrit_alarm Voltage critical low alarm. From VOLTAGE_UV_FAULT status. +in1_crit_alarm Voltage critical high alarm. From VOLTAGE_OV_FAULT status. + +curr1_label "iout1" +curr1_input Measured current. From READ_IOUT register. +curr1_max Maximum current. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +curr1_crit Critical maximum current. From IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register. +curr1_max_alarm Current high alarm. From IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. +curr1_crit_alarm Current critical high alarm. From IOUT_OC_FAULT status. + +temp1_input Measured temperature. From READ_TEMPERATURE_1 register. +temp1_max Maximum temperature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. +temp1_crit Critical high temperature. From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register. +temp1_max_alarm Chip temperature high alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_1 with OT_WARN_LIMIT if TEMP_OT_WARNING + status is set. +temp1_crit_alarm Chip temperature critical high alarm. Set by comparing + READ_TEMPERATURE_1 with OT_FAULT_LIMIT if TEMP_OT_FAULT + status is set. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus index f2d42e8bdf48..5e462fc7f99b 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus @@ -13,26 +13,6 @@ Supported chips: Prefix: 'ltc2978' Addresses scanned: - Datasheet: http://cds.linear.com/docs/Datasheet/2978fa.pdf - * Maxim MAX16064 - Quad Power-Supply Controller - Prefix: 'max16064' - Addresses scanned: - - Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX16064.pdf - * Maxim MAX34440 - PMBus 6-Channel Power-Supply Manager - Prefixes: 'max34440' - Addresses scanned: - - Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34440.pdf - * Maxim MAX34441 - PMBus 5-Channel Power-Supply Manager and Intelligent Fan Controller - Prefixes: 'max34441' - Addresses scanned: - - Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX34441.pdf - * Maxim MAX8688 - Digital Power-Supply Controller/Monitor - Prefix: 'max8688' - Addresses scanned: - - Datasheet: http://datasheets.maxim-ic.com/en/ds/MAX8688.pdf * Generic PMBus devices Prefix: 'pmbus' Addresses scanned: - @@ -150,11 +130,11 @@ The following attributes are supported. Limits are read-write; all other attributes are read-only. inX_input Measured voltage. From READ_VIN or READ_VOUT register. -inX_min Minumum Voltage. +inX_min Minimum Voltage. From VIN_UV_WARN_LIMIT or VOUT_UV_WARN_LIMIT register. inX_max Maximum voltage. From VIN_OV_WARN_LIMIT or VOUT_OV_WARN_LIMIT register. -inX_lcrit Critical minumum Voltage. +inX_lcrit Critical minimum Voltage. From VIN_UV_FAULT_LIMIT or VOUT_UV_FAULT_LIMIT register. inX_crit Critical maximum voltage. From VIN_OV_FAULT_LIMIT or VOUT_OV_FAULT_LIMIT register. @@ -169,17 +149,19 @@ inX_label "vin", "vcap", or "voutY" currX_input Measured current. From READ_IIN or READ_IOUT register. currX_max Maximum current. From IIN_OC_WARN_LIMIT or IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT register. -currX_lcrit Critical minumum output current. +currX_lcrit Critical minimum output current. From IOUT_UC_FAULT_LIMIT register. currX_crit Critical maximum current. From IIN_OC_FAULT_LIMIT or IOUT_OC_FAULT_LIMIT register. currX_alarm Current high alarm. From IIN_OC_WARNING or IOUT_OC_WARNING status. +currX_max_alarm Current high alarm. + From IIN_OC_WARN_LIMIT or IOUT_OC_WARN_LIMIT status. currX_lcrit_alarm Output current critical low alarm. From IOUT_UC_FAULT status. currX_crit_alarm Current critical high alarm. From IIN_OC_FAULT or IOUT_OC_FAULT status. -currX_label "iin" or "vinY" +currX_label "iin" or "ioutY" powerX_input Measured power. From READ_PIN or READ_POUT register. powerX_cap Output power cap. From POUT_MAX register. @@ -193,13 +175,13 @@ powerX_crit_alarm Output power critical high alarm. From POUT_OP_FAULT status. powerX_label "pin" or "poutY" -tempX_input Measured tempererature. +tempX_input Measured temperature. From READ_TEMPERATURE_X register. -tempX_min Mimimum tempererature. From UT_WARN_LIMIT register. -tempX_max Maximum tempererature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. -tempX_lcrit Critical low tempererature. +tempX_min Mimimum temperature. From UT_WARN_LIMIT register. +tempX_max Maximum temperature. From OT_WARN_LIMIT register. +tempX_lcrit Critical low temperature. From UT_FAULT_LIMIT register. -tempX_crit Critical high tempererature. +tempX_crit Critical high temperature. From OT_FAULT_LIMIT register. tempX_min_alarm Chip temperature low alarm. Set by comparing READ_TEMPERATURE_X with UT_WARN_LIMIT if diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/smm665 b/Documentation/hwmon/smm665 index 3820fc9ca52d..59e316140542 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/smm665 +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/smm665 @@ -150,8 +150,8 @@ in8_crit_alarm Channel F critical alarm in9_crit_alarm AIN1 critical alarm in10_crit_alarm AIN2 critical alarm -temp1_input Chip tempererature -temp1_min Mimimum chip tempererature -temp1_max Maximum chip tempererature -temp1_crit Critical chip tempererature +temp1_input Chip temperature +temp1_min Mimimum chip temperature +temp1_max Maximum chip temperature +temp1_crit Critical chip temperature temp1_crit_alarm Temperature critical alarm diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches b/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..86f42e8e9e49 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + How to Get Your Patch Accepted Into the Hwmon Subsystem + ------------------------------------------------------- + +This text is is a collection of suggestions for people writing patches or +drivers for the hwmon subsystem. Following these suggestions will greatly +increase the chances of your change being accepted. + + +1. General +---------- + +* It should be unnecessary to mention, but please read and follow + Documentation/SubmitChecklist + Documentation/SubmittingDrivers + Documentation/SubmittingPatches + Documentation/CodingStyle + +* If your patch generates checkpatch warnings, please refrain from explanations + such as "I don't like that coding style". Keep in mind that each unnecessary + warning helps hiding a real problem. If you don't like the kernel coding + style, don't write kernel drivers. + +* Please test your patch thoroughly. We are not your test group. + Sometimes a patch can not or not completely be tested because of missing + hardware. In such cases, you should test-build the code on at least one + architecture. If run-time testing was not achieved, it should be written + explicitly below the patch header. + +* If your patch (or the driver) is affected by configuration options such as + CONFIG_SMP or CONFIG_HOTPLUG, make sure it compiles for all configuration + variants. + + +2. Adding functionality to existing drivers +------------------------------------------- + +* Make sure the documentation in Documentation/hwmon/<driver_name> is up to + date. + +* Make sure the information in Kconfig is up to date. + +* If the added functionality requires some cleanup or structural changes, split + your patch into a cleanup part and the actual addition. This makes it easier + to review your changes, and to bisect any resulting problems. + +* Never mix bug fixes, cleanup, and functional enhancements in a single patch. + + +3. New drivers +-------------- + +* Running your patch or driver file(s) through checkpatch does not mean its + formatting is clean. If unsure about formatting in your new driver, run it + through Lindent. Lindent is not perfect, and you may have to do some minor + cleanup, but it is a good start. + +* Consider adding yourself to MAINTAINERS. + +* Document the driver in Documentation/hwmon/<driver_name>. + +* Add the driver to Kconfig and Makefile in alphabetical order. + +* Make sure that all dependencies are listed in Kconfig. For new drivers, it + is most likely prudent to add a dependency on EXPERIMENTAL. + +* Avoid forward declarations if you can. Rearrange the code if necessary. + +* Avoid calculations in macros and macro-generated functions. While such macros + may save a line or so in the source, it obfuscates the code and makes code + review more difficult. It may also result in code which is more complicated + than necessary. Use inline functions or just regular functions instead. + +* If the driver has a detect function, make sure it is silent. Debug messages + and messages printed after a successful detection are acceptable, but it + must not print messages such as "Chip XXX not found/supported". + + Keep in mind that the detect function will run for all drivers supporting an + address if a chip is detected on that address. Unnecessary messages will just + pollute the kernel log and not provide any value. + +* Provide a detect function if and only if a chip can be detected reliably. + +* Avoid writing to chip registers in the detect function. If you have to write, + only do it after you have already gathered enough data to be certain that the + detection is going to be successful. + + Keep in mind that the chip might not be what your driver believes it is, and + writing to it might cause a bad misconfiguration. + +* Make sure there are no race conditions in the probe function. Specifically, + completely initialize your chip first, then create sysfs entries and register + with the hwmon subsystem. + +* Do not provide support for deprecated sysfs attributes. + +* Do not create non-standard attributes unless really needed. If you have to use + non-standard attributes, or you believe you do, discuss it on the mailing list + first. Either case, provide a detailed explanation why you need the + non-standard attribute(s). + Standard attributes are specified in Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface. + +* When deciding which sysfs attributes to support, look at the chip's + capabilities. While we do not expect your driver to support everything the + chip may offer, it should at least support all limits and alarms. + +* Last but not least, please check if a driver for your chip already exists + before starting to write a new driver. Especially for temperature sensors, + new chips are often variants of previously released chips. In some cases, + a presumably new chip may simply have been relabeled. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface index 83a698773ade..8f63c244f1aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface @@ -579,7 +579,7 @@ channel should not be trusted. fan[1-*]_fault temp[1-*]_fault Input fault condition - 0: no fault occured + 0: no fault occurred 1: fault condition RO diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d index ecbc1e4574b4..129b0a3b555b 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83781d @@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ found out the following values do work as a form of coarse pwm: 0x80 - seems to turn fans off after some time(1-2 minutes)... might be some form of auto-fan-control based on temp? hmm (Qfan? this mobo is an -old ASUS, it isn't marketed as Qfan. Maybe some beta pre-attemp at Qfan +old ASUS, it isn't marketed as Qfan. Maybe some beta pre-attempt at Qfan that was dropped at the BIOS) 0x81 - off 0x82 - slightly "on-ner" than off, but my fans do not get to move. I can diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d index 5663e491655c..90387c3540f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/w83791d @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ The sysfs interface to the beep bitmask has migrated from the original legacy method of a single sysfs beep_mask file to a newer method using multiple *_beep files as described in .../Documentation/hwmon/sysfs-interface. -A similar change has occured for the bitmap corresponding to the alarms. The +A similar change has occurred for the bitmap corresponding to the alarms. The original legacy method used a single sysfs alarms file containing a bitmap of triggered alarms. The newer method uses multiple sysfs *_alarm files (again following the pattern described in sysfs-interface). diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light index bdc9cbb2e0f2..c22ee063e1e5 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-parport-light @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Author: Jean Delvare <khali@linux-fr.org> This driver is a light version of i2c-parport. It doesn't depend on the parport driver, and uses direct I/O access instead. This might be -prefered on embedded systems where wasting memory for the clean but heavy +preferred on embedded systems where wasting memory for the clean but heavy parport handling is not an option. The drawback is a reduced portability and the impossibility to daisy-chain other parallel port devices. diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x index 70e6a0cc1e15..0b979f3252a4 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-sis96x @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ or perhaps this... (kernel versions later than 2.4.18 may fill in the "Unknown"s) -If you cant see it please look on quirk_sis_96x_smbus +If you can't see it please look on quirk_sis_96x_smbus (drivers/pci/quirks.c) (also if southbridge detection fails) I suspect that this driver could be made to work for the following SiS diff --git a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-taos-evm b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-taos-evm index 9146e33be6dd..63f62bcbf592 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-taos-evm +++ b/Documentation/i2c/busses/i2c-taos-evm @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Currently supported devices are: * TAOS TSL2550 EVM -For addtional information on TAOS products, please see +For additional information on TAOS products, please see http://www.taosinc.com/ diff --git a/Documentation/i2o/README b/Documentation/i2o/README index 0ebf58c73f54..ee91e2626ff0 100644 --- a/Documentation/i2o/README +++ b/Documentation/i2o/README @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Symbios Logic (Now LSI) BoxHill Corporation Loan of initial FibreChannel disk array used for development work. -European Comission +European Commission Funding the work done by the University of Helsinki SysKonnect diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/aliasing-test.c b/Documentation/ia64/aliasing-test.c index 3dfb76ca6931..5caa2af33207 100644 --- a/Documentation/ia64/aliasing-test.c +++ b/Documentation/ia64/aliasing-test.c @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ static int scan_rom(char *path, char *file) /* * It's OK if the ROM is unreadable. Maybe there - * is no ROM, or some other error ocurred. The + * is no ROM, or some other error occurred. The * important thing is that no MCA happened. */ if (rc > 0) diff --git a/Documentation/input/event-codes.txt b/Documentation/input/event-codes.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..23fcb05175be --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/input/event-codes.txt @@ -0,0 +1,262 @@ +The input protocol uses a map of types and codes to express input device values +to userspace. This document describes the types and codes and how and when they +may be used. + +A single hardware event generates multiple input events. Each input event +contains the new value of a single data item. A special event type, EV_SYN, is +used to separate input events into packets of input data changes occurring at +the same moment in time. In the following, the term "event" refers to a single +input event encompassing a type, code, and value. + +The input protocol is a stateful protocol. Events are emitted only when values +of event codes have changed. However, the state is maintained within the Linux +input subsystem; drivers do not need to maintain the state and may attempt to +emit unchanged values without harm. Userspace may obtain the current state of +event code values using the EVIOCG* ioctls defined in linux/input.h. The event +reports supported by a device are also provided by sysfs in +class/input/event*/device/capabilities/, and the properties of a device are +provided in class/input/event*/device/properties. + +Types: +========== +Types are groupings of codes under a logical input construct. Each type has a +set of applicable codes to be used in generating events. See the Codes section +for details on valid codes for each type. + +* EV_SYN: + - Used as markers to separate events. Events may be separated in time or in + space, such as with the multitouch protocol. + +* EV_KEY: + - Used to describe state changes of keyboards, buttons, or other key-like + devices. + +* EV_REL: + - Used to describe relative axis value changes, e.g. moving the mouse 5 units + to the left. + +* EV_ABS: + - Used to describe absolute axis value changes, e.g. describing the + coordinates of a touch on a touchscreen. + +* EV_MSC: + - Used to describe miscellaneous input data that do not fit into other types. + +* EV_SW: + - Used to describe binary state input switches. + +* EV_LED: + - Used to turn LEDs on devices on and off. + +* EV_SND: + - Used to output sound to devices. + +* EV_REP: + - Used for autorepeating devices. + +* EV_FF: + - Used to send force feedback commands to an input device. + +* EV_PWR: + - A special type for power button and switch input. + +* EV_FF_STATUS: + - Used to receive force feedback device status. + +Codes: +========== +Codes define the precise type of event. + +EV_SYN: +---------- +EV_SYN event values are undefined. Their usage is defined only by when they are +sent in the evdev event stream. + +* SYN_REPORT: + - Used to synchronize and separate events into packets of input data changes + occurring at the same moment in time. For example, motion of a mouse may set + the REL_X and REL_Y values for one motion, then emit a SYN_REPORT. The next + motion will emit more REL_X and REL_Y values and send another SYN_REPORT. + +* SYN_CONFIG: + - TBD + +* SYN_MT_REPORT: + - Used to synchronize and separate touch events. See the + multi-touch-protocol.txt document for more information. + +* SYN_DROPPED: + - Used to indicate buffer overrun in the evdev client's event queue. + Client should ignore all events up to and including next SYN_REPORT + event and query the device (using EVIOCG* ioctls) to obtain its + current state. + +EV_KEY: +---------- +EV_KEY events take the form KEY_<name> or BTN_<name>. For example, KEY_A is used +to represent the 'A' key on a keyboard. When a key is depressed, an event with +the key's code is emitted with value 1. When the key is released, an event is +emitted with value 0. Some hardware send events when a key is repeated. These +events have a value of 2. In general, KEY_<name> is used for keyboard keys, and +BTN_<name> is used for other types of momentary switch events. + +A few EV_KEY codes have special meanings: + +* BTN_TOOL_<name>: + - These codes are used in conjunction with input trackpads, tablets, and + touchscreens. These devices may be used with fingers, pens, or other tools. + When an event occurs and a tool is used, the corresponding BTN_TOOL_<name> + code should be set to a value of 1. When the tool is no longer interacting + with the input device, the BTN_TOOL_<name> code should be reset to 0. All + trackpads, tablets, and touchscreens should use at least one BTN_TOOL_<name> + code when events are generated. + +* BTN_TOUCH: + BTN_TOUCH is used for touch contact. While an input tool is determined to be + within meaningful physical contact, the value of this property must be set + to 1. Meaningful physical contact may mean any contact, or it may mean + contact conditioned by an implementation defined property. For example, a + touchpad may set the value to 1 only when the touch pressure rises above a + certain value. BTN_TOUCH may be combined with BTN_TOOL_<name> codes. For + example, a pen tablet may set BTN_TOOL_PEN to 1 and BTN_TOUCH to 0 while the + pen is hovering over but not touching the tablet surface. + +Note: For appropriate function of the legacy mousedev emulation driver, +BTN_TOUCH must be the first evdev code emitted in a synchronization frame. + +Note: Historically a touch device with BTN_TOOL_FINGER and BTN_TOUCH was +interpreted as a touchpad by userspace, while a similar device without +BTN_TOOL_FINGER was interpreted as a touchscreen. For backwards compatibility +with current userspace it is recommended to follow this distinction. In the +future, this distinction will be deprecated and the device properties ioctl +EVIOCGPROP, defined in linux/input.h, will be used to convey the device type. + +* BTN_TOOL_FINGER, BTN_TOOL_DOUBLETAP, BTN_TOOL_TRIPLETAP, BTN_TOOL_QUADTAP: + - These codes denote one, two, three, and four finger interaction on a + trackpad or touchscreen. For example, if the user uses two fingers and moves + them on the touchpad in an effort to scroll content on screen, + BTN_TOOL_DOUBLETAP should be set to value 1 for the duration of the motion. + Note that all BTN_TOOL_<name> codes and the BTN_TOUCH code are orthogonal in + purpose. A trackpad event generated by finger touches should generate events + for one code from each group. At most only one of these BTN_TOOL_<name> + codes should have a value of 1 during any synchronization frame. + +Note: Historically some drivers emitted multiple of the finger count codes with +a value of 1 in the same synchronization frame. This usage is deprecated. + +Note: In multitouch drivers, the input_mt_report_finger_count() function should +be used to emit these codes. Please see multi-touch-protocol.txt for details. + +EV_REL: +---------- +EV_REL events describe relative changes in a property. For example, a mouse may +move to the left by a certain number of units, but its absolute position in +space is unknown. If the absolute position is known, EV_ABS codes should be used +instead of EV_REL codes. + +A few EV_REL codes have special meanings: + +* REL_WHEEL, REL_HWHEEL: + - These codes are used for vertical and horizontal scroll wheels, + respectively. + +EV_ABS: +---------- +EV_ABS events describe absolute changes in a property. For example, a touchpad +may emit coordinates for a touch location. + +A few EV_ABS codes have special meanings: + +* ABS_DISTANCE: + - Used to describe the distance of a tool from an interaction surface. This + event should only be emitted while the tool is hovering, meaning in close + proximity of the device and while the value of the BTN_TOUCH code is 0. If + the input device may be used freely in three dimensions, consider ABS_Z + instead. + +* ABS_MT_<name>: + - Used to describe multitouch input events. Please see + multi-touch-protocol.txt for details. + +EV_SW: +---------- +EV_SW events describe stateful binary switches. For example, the SW_LID code is +used to denote when a laptop lid is closed. + +Upon binding to a device or resuming from suspend, a driver must report +the current switch state. This ensures that the device, kernel, and userspace +state is in sync. + +Upon resume, if the switch state is the same as before suspend, then the input +subsystem will filter out the duplicate switch state reports. The driver does +not need to keep the state of the switch at any time. + +EV_MSC: +---------- +EV_MSC events are used for input and output events that do not fall under other +categories. + +EV_LED: +---------- +EV_LED events are used for input and output to set and query the state of +various LEDs on devices. + +EV_REP: +---------- +EV_REP events are used for specifying autorepeating events. + +EV_SND: +---------- +EV_SND events are used for sending sound commands to simple sound output +devices. + +EV_FF: +---------- +EV_FF events are used to initialize a force feedback capable device and to cause +such device to feedback. + +EV_PWR: +---------- +EV_PWR events are a special type of event used specifically for power +mangement. Its usage is not well defined. To be addressed later. + +Guidelines: +========== +The guidelines below ensure proper single-touch and multi-finger functionality. +For multi-touch functionality, see the multi-touch-protocol.txt document for +more information. + +Mice: +---------- +REL_{X,Y} must be reported when the mouse moves. BTN_LEFT must be used to report +the primary button press. BTN_{MIDDLE,RIGHT,4,5,etc.} should be used to report +further buttons of the device. REL_WHEEL and REL_HWHEEL should be used to report +scroll wheel events where available. + +Touchscreens: +---------- +ABS_{X,Y} must be reported with the location of the touch. BTN_TOUCH must be +used to report when a touch is active on the screen. +BTN_{MOUSE,LEFT,MIDDLE,RIGHT} must not be reported as the result of touch +contact. BTN_TOOL_<name> events should be reported where possible. + +Trackpads: +---------- +Legacy trackpads that only provide relative position information must report +events like mice described above. + +Trackpads that provide absolute touch position must report ABS_{X,Y} for the +location of the touch. BTN_TOUCH should be used to report when a touch is active +on the trackpad. Where multi-finger support is available, BTN_TOOL_<name> should +be used to report the number of touches active on the trackpad. + +Tablets: +---------- +BTN_TOOL_<name> events must be reported when a stylus or other tool is active on +the tablet. ABS_{X,Y} must be reported with the location of the tool. BTN_TOUCH +should be used to report when the tool is in contact with the tablet. +BTN_{STYLUS,STYLUS2} should be used to report buttons on the tool itself. Any +button may be used for buttons on the tablet except BTN_{MOUSE,LEFT}. +BTN_{0,1,2,etc} are good generic codes for unlabeled buttons. Do not use +meaningful buttons, like BTN_FORWARD, unless the button is labeled for that +purpose on the device. diff --git a/Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt b/Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt index 1c856f32ff2c..56870c70a796 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ if you want to use gamecon.c. Also, the connection is a bit more complex. You'll need a bunch of diodes, and one pullup resistor. First, you connect the Directions and the button -the same as for db9, however with the diodes inbetween. +the same as for db9, however with the diodes between. Diodes (pin 2) -----|<|----> Up diff --git a/Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt b/Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt index 8b4129de1d2d..943e8f6f2b15 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/rotary-encoder.txt @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ c) Falling edge on channel A, channel B in high state d) Falling edge on channel B, channel A in low state Parking position. If the encoder enters this state, a full transition - should have happend, unless it flipped back on half the way. The + should have happened, unless it flipped back on half the way. The 'armed' state tells us about that. 2. Platform requirements diff --git a/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt b/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt index 8f4289efc5c4..561385d38482 100644 --- a/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt +++ b/Documentation/input/walkera0701.txt @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ pulse length: 24 bin+oct values + 1 bin value = 24*4+1 bits = 97 bits -(Warning, pulses on ACK ar inverted by transistor, irq is rised up on sync +(Warning, pulses on ACK are inverted by transistor, irq is raised up on sync to bin change or octal value to bin change). Binary data representations: diff --git a/Documentation/irqflags-tracing.txt b/Documentation/irqflags-tracing.txt index 6a444877ee0b..67aa71e73035 100644 --- a/Documentation/irqflags-tracing.txt +++ b/Documentation/irqflags-tracing.txt @@ -53,5 +53,5 @@ implementation in an architecture: lockdep will detect that and will turn itself off. I.e. the lock validator will still be reliable. There should be no crashes due to irq-tracing bugs. (except if the assembly changes break other code by modifying conditions or registers that -shouldnt be) +shouldn't be) diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/INTERFACE.CAPI b/Documentation/isdn/INTERFACE.CAPI index 309eb5ed942b..1688b5a1fd77 100644 --- a/Documentation/isdn/INTERFACE.CAPI +++ b/Documentation/isdn/INTERFACE.CAPI @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ Functions capi_cmsg2message() and capi_message2cmsg() are provided to convert messages between their transport encoding described in the CAPI 2.0 standard and their _cmsg structure representation. Note that capi_cmsg2message() does not know or check the size of its destination buffer. The caller must make -sure it is big enough to accomodate the resulting CAPI message. +sure it is big enough to accommodate the resulting CAPI message. 5. Lower Layer Interface Functions diff --git a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO index b63301a03811..050d37fe6d40 100644 --- a/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO +++ b/Documentation/ja_JP/HOWTO @@ -11,14 +11,14 @@ for non English (read: Japanese) speakers and is not intended as a fork. So if you have any comments or updates for this file, please try to update the original English file first. -Last Updated: 2008/10/24 +Last Updated: 2011/03/31 ================================== これは、 -linux-2.6.28/Documentation/HOWTO +linux-2.6.38/Documentation/HOWTO の和訳です。 翻訳団体： JF プロジェクト < http://www.linux.or.jp/JF/ > -翻訳日： 2008/10/24 +翻訳日： 2011/3/28 翻訳者： Tsugikazu Shibata <tshibata at ab dot jp dot nec dot com> 校正者： 松倉さん <nbh--mats at nifty dot com> 小林 雅典さん (Masanori Kobayasi) <zap03216 at nifty dot ne dot jp> @@ -256,8 +256,8 @@ Linux カーネルの開発プロセスは現在幾つかの異なるメイン - メインの 2.6.x カーネルツリー - 2.6.x.y -stable カーネルツリー - 2.6.x -git カーネルパッチ - - 2.6.x -mm カーネルパッチ - サブシステム毎のカーネルツリーとパッチ + - 統合テストのための 2.6.x -next カーネルツリー 2.6.x カーネルツリー ----------------- @@ -268,9 +268,9 @@ Linux カーネルの開発プロセスは現在幾つかの異なるメイン - 新しいカーネルがリリースされた直後に、2週間の特別期間が設けられ、 この期間中に、メンテナ達は Linus に大きな差分を送ることができます。 - このような差分は通常 -mm カーネルに数週間含まれてきたパッチです。 + このような差分は通常 -next カーネルに数週間含まれてきたパッチです。 大きな変更は git(カーネルのソース管理ツール、詳細は - http://git.or.cz/ 参照) を使って送るのが好ましいやり方ですが、パッ + http://git-scm.com/ 参照) を使って送るのが好ましいやり方ですが、パッ チファイルの形式のまま送るのでも十分です。 - 2週間後、-rc1 カーネルがリリースされ、この後にはカーネル全体の安定 @@ -333,86 +333,44 @@ git リポジトリで管理されているLinus のカーネルツリーの毎 れは -rc カーネルと比べて、パッチが大丈夫かどうかも確認しないで自動的 に生成されるので、より実験的です。 -2.6.x -mm カーネルパッチ ------------------------- - -Andrew Morton によってリリースされる実験的なカーネルパッチ群です。 -Andrew は個別のサブシステムカーネルツリーとパッチを全て集めてきて -linux-kernel メーリングリストで収集された多数のパッチと同時に一つにま -とめます。 -このツリーは新機能とパッチが検証される場となります。ある期間の間パッチ -が -mm に入って価値を証明されたら、Andrew やサブシステムメンテナが、 -メインラインへ入れるように Linus にプッシュします。 - -メインカーネルツリーに含めるために Linus に送る前に、すべての新しいパッ -チが -mm ツリーでテストされることが強く推奨されています。マージウィン -ドウが開く前に -mm ツリーに現れなかったパッチはメインラインにマージさ -れることは困難になります。 - -これらのカーネルは安定して動作すべきシステムとして使うのには適切ではあ -りませんし、カーネルブランチの中でももっとも動作にリスクが高いものです。 - -もしあなたが、カーネル開発プロセスの支援をしたいと思っているのであれば、 -どうぞこれらのカーネルリリースをテストに使ってみて、そしてもし問題があ -れば、またもし全てが正しく動作したとしても、linux-kernel メーリングリ -ストにフィードバックを提供してください。 - -すべての他の実験的パッチに加えて、これらのカーネルは通常リリース時点で -メインラインの -git カーネルに含まれる全ての変更も含んでいます。 - --mm カーネルは決まったスケジュールではリリースされません、しかし通常幾 -つかの -mm カーネル (1 から 3 が普通）が各-rc カーネルの間にリリースさ -れます。 - サブシステム毎のカーネルツリーとパッチ ------------------------------------------- -カーネルの様々な領域で何が起きているかを見られるようにするため、多くの -カーネルサブシステム開発者は彼らの開発ツリーを公開しています。これらの -ツリーは説明したように -mm カーネルリリースに入れ込まれます。 - -以下はさまざまなカーネルツリーの中のいくつかのリスト- - - git ツリー- - - Kbuild の開発ツリー、Sam Ravnborg <sam@ravnborg.org> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/sam/kbuild.git - - - ACPI の開発ツリー、 Len Brown <len.brown@intel.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/lenb/linux-acpi-2.6.git - - - Block の開発ツリー、Jens Axboe <axboe@suse.de> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/axboe/linux-2.6-block.git - - - DRM の開発ツリー、Dave Airlie <airlied@linux.ie> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/airlied/drm-2.6.git - - - ia64 の開発ツリー、Tony Luck <tony.luck@intel.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aegl/linux-2.6.git - - - infiniband, Roland Dreier <rolandd@cisco.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/roland/infiniband.git - - - libata, Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jgarzik/libata-dev.git - - - ネットワークドライバ, Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jgarzik/netdev-2.6.git - - - pcmcia, Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git - - - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@hansenpartnership.com> - git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git - - - x86, Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu> - git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/x86/linux-2.6-x86.git - - quilt ツリー- - - USB, ドライバコアと I2C, Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@suse.de> - kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/people/gregkh/gregkh-2.6/ +それぞれのカーネルサブシステムのメンテナ達は --- そして多くのカーネル +サブシステムの開発者達も --- 各自の最新の開発状況をソースリポジトリに +公開しています。そのため、自分とは異なる領域のカーネルで何が起きている +かを他の人が見られるようになっています。開発が早く進んでいる領域では、 +開発者は自身の投稿がどのサブシステムカーネルツリーを元にしているか質問 +されるので、その投稿とすでに進行中の他の作業との衝突が避けられます。 + +大部分のこれらのリポジトリは git ツリーです。しかしその他の SCM や +quilt シリーズとして公開されているパッチキューも使われています。これら +のサブシステムリポジトリのアドレスは MAINTAINERS ファイルにリストされ +ています。これらの多くは http://git.kernel.org/ で参照することができま +す。 - その他のカーネルツリーは http://git.kernel.org/ と MAINTAINERS ファ - イルに一覧表があります。 +提案されたパッチがこのようなサブシステムツリーにコミットされる前に、メー +リングリストで事前にレビューにかけられます（以下の対応するセクションを +参照）。いくつかのカーネルサブシステムでは、このレビューは patchwork +というツールによって追跡されます。Patchwork は web インターフェイスに +よってパッチ投稿の表示、パッチへのコメント付けや改訂などができ、そして +メンテナはパッチに対して、レビュー中、受付済み、拒否というようなマーク +をつけることができます。大部分のこれらの patchwork のサイトは +http://patchwork.kernel.org/ でリストされています。 + +統合テストのための 2.6.x -next カーネルツリー +--------------------------------------------- + +サブシステムツリーの更新内容がメインラインの 2.6.x ツリーにマージされ +る前に、それらは統合テストされる必要があります。この目的のため、実質的 +に全サブシステムツリーからほぼ毎日プルされてできる特別なテスト用のリ +ポジトリが存在します- + http://git.kernel.org/?p=linux/kernel/git/sfr/linux-next.git + http://linux.f-seidel.de/linux-next/pmwiki/ + +このやり方によって、-next カーネルは次のマージ機会でどんなものがメイン +ラインカーネルにマージされるか、おおまかなの展望を提供します。-next +カーネルの実行テストを行う冒険好きなテスターは大いに歓迎されます バグレポート ------------- @@ -673,10 +631,9 @@ Linux カーネルコミュニティは、一度に大量のコードの塊を じところからスタートしたのですから。 Paolo Ciarrocchi に感謝、彼は彼の書いた "Development Process" -(http://linux.tar.bz/articles/2.6-development_process)セクショ -ンをこのテキストの原型にすることを許可してくれました。 -Rundy Dunlap と Gerrit Huizenga はメーリングリストでやるべきこととやっ -てはいけないことのリストを提供してくれました。 +(http://lwn.net/Articles/94386/) セクションをこのテキストの原型にする +ことを許可してくれました。Rundy Dunlap と Gerrit Huizenga はメーリング +リストでやるべきこととやってはいけないことのリストを提供してくれました。 以下の人々のレビュー、コメント、貢献に感謝。 Pat Mochel, Hanna Linder, Randy Dunlap, Kay Sievers, Vojtech Pavlik, Jan Kara, Josh Boyer, Kees Cook, Andrew Morton, Andi diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt index f1431d099fce..7c2a89ba674c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kbuild.txt @@ -26,11 +26,11 @@ Additional options to the assembler (for built-in and modules). AFLAGS_MODULE -------------------------------------------------- -Addtional module specific options to use for $(AS). +Additional module specific options to use for $(AS). AFLAGS_KERNEL -------------------------------------------------- -Addtional options for $(AS) when used for assembler +Additional options for $(AS) when used for assembler code for code that is compiled as built-in. KCFLAGS @@ -39,12 +39,12 @@ Additional options to the C compiler (for built-in and modules). CFLAGS_KERNEL -------------------------------------------------- -Addtional options for $(CC) when used to compile +Additional options for $(CC) when used to compile code that is compiled as built-in. CFLAGS_MODULE -------------------------------------------------- -Addtional module specific options to use for $(CC). +Additional module specific options to use for $(CC). LDFLAGS_MODULE -------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt index c357a31411cd..c603ef7b0568 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. acpi_sleep= [HW,ACPI] Sleep options Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, s4_nohwsig, - old_ordering, s4_nonvs, sci_force_enable } + old_ordering, nonvs, sci_force_enable } See Documentation/power/video.txt for information on s3_bios and s3_mode. s3_beep is for debugging; it makes the PC's speaker beep @@ -699,7 +699,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. ekgdboc= [X86,KGDB] Allow early kernel console debugging ekgdboc=kbd - This is desgined to be used in conjunction with + This is designed to be used in conjunction with the boot argument: earlyprintk=vga edd= [EDD] @@ -1664,6 +1664,10 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. noexec=on: enable non-executable mappings (default) noexec=off: disable non-executable mappings + nosmep [X86] + Disable SMEP (Supervisor Mode Execution Protection) + even if it is supported by processor. + noexec32 [X86-64] This affects only 32-bit executables. noexec32=on: enable non-executable mappings (default) @@ -1832,15 +1836,17 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. perfmon on Intel CPUs instead of the CPU specific event set. - oops=panic Always panic on oopses. Default is to just kill the process, - but there is a small probability of deadlocking the machine. + oops=panic Always panic on oopses. Default is to just kill the + process, but there is a small probability of + deadlocking the machine. This will also cause panics on machine check exceptions. Useful together with panic=30 to trigger a reboot. OSS [HW,OSS] See Documentation/sound/oss/oss-parameters.txt - panic= [KNL] Kernel behaviour on panic + panic= [KNL] Kernel behaviour on panic: delay <timeout> + seconds before rebooting Format: <timeout> parkbd.port= [HW] Parallel port number the keyboard adapter is @@ -2343,6 +2349,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. softlockup_panic= [KNL] Should the soft-lockup detector generate panics. + Format: <integer> sonypi.*= [HW] Sony Programmable I/O Control Device driver See Documentation/sonypi.txt @@ -2475,8 +2482,8 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. topology= [S390] Format: {off | on} Specify if the kernel should make use of the cpu - topology informations if the hardware supports these. - The scheduler will make use of these informations and + topology information if the hardware supports this. + The scheduler will make use of this information and e.g. base its process migration decisions on it. Default is on. @@ -2529,8 +2536,7 @@ bytes respectively. Such letter suffixes can also be entirely omitted. reported either. unknown_nmi_panic - [X86] - Set unknown_nmi_panic=1 early on boot. + [X86] Cause panic on unknown NMI. usbcore.autosuspend= [USB] The autosuspend time delay (in seconds) used diff --git a/Documentation/kmemleak.txt b/Documentation/kmemleak.txt index 34f6638aa5ac..090e6ee04536 100644 --- a/Documentation/kmemleak.txt +++ b/Documentation/kmemleak.txt @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ with the difference that the orphan objects are not freed but only reported via /sys/kernel/debug/kmemleak. A similar method is used by the Valgrind tool (memcheck --leak-check) to detect the memory leaks in user-space applications. +Kmemleak is supported on x86, arm, powerpc, sparc, sh, microblaze and tile. Usage ----- @@ -178,5 +179,4 @@ block doesn't need to be freed (some cases in the init_call functions), the pointer is calculated by other methods than the usual container_of macro or the pointer is stored in a location not scanned by kmemleak. -Page allocations and ioremap are not tracked. Only the ARM and x86 -architectures are currently supported. +Page allocations and ioremap are not tracked. diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt b/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt index c1c5be84e4b1..803e51f6768b 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Usage Hotkeys are also reported as input keys (like keyboards) you can check which key are supported using "xev" under X11. - You can get informations on the version of your DSDT table by reading the + You can get information on the version of your DSDT table by reading the /sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/infos entry. If you have a question or a bug report to do, please include the output of this entry. @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ LED display ----------- Some models like the W1N have a LED display that can be used to display - several informations. + several items of information. LED display works for the following models: W1000N diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt b/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt index 23ce7d350d1a..2bd4e82e5d9f 100644 --- a/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt +++ b/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt @@ -14,7 +14,8 @@ Some models report hotkeys through the SNC or SPIC devices, such events are reported both through the ACPI subsystem as acpi events and through the INPUT subsystem. See the logs of acpid or /proc/acpi/event and /proc/bus/input/devices to find out what those events are and which input -devices are created by the driver. +devices are created by the driver. Additionally, loading the driver with the +debug option will report all events in the kernel log. Backlight control: ------------------ @@ -64,6 +65,16 @@ powers off the sound card, # echo "1" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/audiopower powers on the sound card. + +RFkill control: +--------------- +More recent Vaio models expose a consistent set of ACPI methods to +control radio frequency emitting devices. If you are a lucky owner of +such a laptop you will find the necessary rfkill devices under +/sys/class/rfkill. Check those starting with sony-* in + # grep . /sys/class/rfkill/*/{state,name} + + Development: ------------ @@ -75,8 +86,21 @@ pass the option 'debug=1'. REPEAT: DON'T DO THIS IF YOU DON'T LIKE RISKY BUSINESS. In your kernel logs you will find the list of all ACPI methods -the SNC device has on your laptop. You can see the GCDP/GCDP methods -used to pwer on/off the CD drive, but there are others. +the SNC device has on your laptop. + +* For new models you will see a long list of meaningless method names, +reading the DSDT table source should reveal that: +(1) the SNC device uses an internal capability lookup table +(2) SN00 is used to find values in the lookup table +(3) SN06 and SN07 are used to call into the real methods based on + offsets you can obtain iterating the table using SN00 +(4) SN02 used to enable events. +Some values in the capability lookup table are more or less known, see +the code for all sony_call_snc_handle calls, others are more obscure. + +* For old models you can see the GCDP/GCDP methods used to pwer on/off +the CD drive, but there are others and they are usually different from +model to model. I HAVE NO IDEA WHAT THOSE METHODS DO. @@ -108,9 +132,8 @@ Bugs/Limitations: laptop, including permanent damage. * The sony-laptop and sonypi drivers do not interact at all. In the - future, sonypi could use sony-laptop to do (part of) its business. + future, sonypi will be removed and replaced by sony-laptop. * spicctrl, which is the userspace tool used to communicate with the - sonypi driver (through /dev/sonypi) does not try to use the - sony-laptop driver. In the future, spicctrl could try sonypi first, - and if it isn't present, try sony-laptop instead. + sonypi driver (through /dev/sonypi) is deprecated as well since all + its features are now available under the sysfs tree via sony-laptop. diff --git a/Documentation/leds/00-INDEX b/Documentation/leds/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..29f481df32c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/leds/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +leds-class.txt + - documents LED handling under Linux. +leds-lp3944.txt + - notes on how to use the leds-lp3944 driver. +leds-lp5521.txt + - notes on how to use the leds-lp5521 driver. +leds-lp5523.txt + - notes on how to use the leds-lp5523 driver. diff --git a/Documentation/leds-class.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt index 58b266bd1846..4996586e27e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds-class.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt @@ -95,4 +95,3 @@ There are a number of cases where a trigger might only be mappable to a particular LED (ACPI?). The addition of triggers provided by the LED driver should cover this option and be possible to add without breaking the current interface. - diff --git a/Documentation/leds-lp3944.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.txt index c6eda18b15ef..c6eda18b15ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/leds-lp3944.txt +++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.txt diff --git a/Documentation/md.txt b/Documentation/md.txt index a81c7b4790f2..2366b1c8cf19 100644 --- a/Documentation/md.txt +++ b/Documentation/md.txt @@ -552,6 +552,16 @@ also have within the array where IO will be blocked. This is currently only supported for raid4/5/6. + sync_min + sync_max + The two values, given as numbers of sectors, indicate a range + withing the array where 'check'/'repair' will operate. Must be + a multiple of chunk_size. When it reaches "sync_max" it will + pause, rather than complete. + You can use 'select' or 'poll' on "sync_completed" to wait for + that number to reach sync_max. Then you can either increase + "sync_max", or can write 'idle' to "sync_action". + Each active md device may also have attributes specific to the personality module that manages it. diff --git a/Documentation/media-framework.txt b/Documentation/media-framework.txt index fd48add02cb0..76a2087db205 100644 --- a/Documentation/media-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/media-framework.txt @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ each pad. Links are represented by a struct media_link instance, defined in include/media/media-entity.h. Each entity stores all links originating at or -targetting any of its pads in a links array. A given link is thus stored +targeting any of its pads in a links array. A given link is thus stored twice, once in the source entity and once in the target entity. The array is pre-allocated and grows dynamically as needed. @@ -348,6 +348,6 @@ a streaming entity. Links that can be modified while streaming must be marked with the MEDIA_LNK_FL_DYNAMIC flag. If other operations need to be disallowed on streaming entities (such as -changing entities configuration parameters) drivers can explictly check the +changing entities configuration parameters) drivers can explicitly check the media_entity stream_count field to find out if an entity is streaming. This operation must be done with the media_device graph_mutex held. diff --git a/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README b/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README index 8ace35ebdcd5..cc887ecfd6eb 100644 --- a/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README +++ b/Documentation/mips/AU1xxx_IDE.README @@ -39,13 +39,13 @@ Note: for more information, please refer "AMD Alchemy Au1200/Au1550 IDE Interface and Linux Device Driver" Application Note. -FILES, CONFIGS AND COMPATABILITY +FILES, CONFIGS AND COMPATIBILITY -------------------------------- Two files are introduced: a) 'arch/mips/include/asm/mach-au1x00/au1xxx_ide.h' - containes : struct _auide_hwif + contains : struct _auide_hwif timing parameters for PIO mode 0/1/2/3/4 timing parameters for MWDMA 0/1/2 diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/ics932s401 b/Documentation/misc-devices/ics932s401 index 07a739f406d8..bdac67ff6e3f 100644 --- a/Documentation/misc-devices/ics932s401 +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/ics932s401 @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ Supported chips: * IDT ICS932S401 Prefix: 'ics932s401' Addresses scanned: I2C 0x69 - Datasheet: Publically available at the IDT website + Datasheet: Publicly available at the IDT website Author: Darrick J. Wong diff --git a/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt b/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt index 4af8071a6d18..dadfe8147ab8 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/3c359.txt @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ debugging messages on, that must be done by modified the source code. Variable MTU size: -The driver can handle a MTU size upto either 4500 or 18000 depending upon +The driver can handle a MTU size up to either 4500 or 18000 depending upon ring speed. The driver also changes the size of the receive buffers as part of the mtu re-sizing, so if you set mtu = 18000, you will need to be able to allocate 16 * (sk_buff with 18000 buffer size) call it 18500 bytes per ring diff --git a/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 b/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 index 616a8e540b0b..b7658bed4906 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 +++ b/Documentation/networking/README.ipw2200 @@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ You can set the debug level via: Where $VALUE would be a number in the case of this sysfs entry. The input to sysfs files does not have to be a number. For example, the -firmware loader used by hotplug utilizes sysfs entries for transfering +firmware loader used by hotplug utilizes sysfs entries for transferring the firmware image from user space into the driver. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux exposes sysfs entries diff --git a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt index 18afcd8afd51..88d4afbdef98 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/batman-adv.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -[state: 27-01-2011] +[state: 17-04-2011] BATMAN-ADV ---------- @@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ duce the overhead to a minimum. It does not depend on any (other) network driver, and can be used on wifi as well as ethernet lan, vpn, etc ... (anything with ethernet-style layer 2). + CONFIGURATION ------------- @@ -72,7 +73,7 @@ folder: # fragmentation gw_sel_class vis_mode -There is a special folder for debugging informations: +There is a special folder for debugging information: # ls /sys/kernel/debug/batman_adv/bat0/ # gateways socket transtable_global vis_data @@ -160,13 +161,13 @@ face. Each entry can/has to have the following values: -> "TQ mac value" - src mac's link quality towards mac address of a neighbor originator's interface which is being used for routing --> "HNA mac" - HNA announced by source mac +-> "TT mac" - TT announced by source mac -> "PRIMARY" - this is a primary interface -> "SEC mac" - secondary mac address of source (requires preceding PRIMARY) The TQ value has a range from 4 to 255 with 255 being the best. -The HNA entries are showing which hosts are connected to the mesh +The TT entries are showing which hosts are connected to the mesh via bat0 or being bridged into the mesh network. The PRIMARY/SEC values are only applied on primary interfaces @@ -199,7 +200,7 @@ abled during run time. Following log_levels are defined: 0 - All debug output disabled 1 - Enable messages related to routing / flooding / broadcasting -2 - Enable route or hna added / changed / deleted +2 - Enable route or tt entry added / changed / deleted 3 - Enable all messages The debug output can be changed at runtime using the file @@ -207,7 +208,7 @@ The debug output can be changed at runtime using the file # echo 2 > /sys/class/net/bat0/mesh/log_level -will enable debug messages for when routes or HNAs change. +will enable debug messages for when routes or TTs change. BATCTL diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt index b36e741e94db..1f45bd887d65 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Linux Ethernet Bonding Driver HOWTO - Latest update: 23 September 2009 + Latest update: 27 April 2011 Initial release : Thomas Davis <tadavis at lbl.gov> Corrections, HA extensions : 2000/10/03-15 : @@ -368,7 +368,7 @@ fail_over_mac gratuitous ARP is lost, communication may be disrupted. - When this policy is used in conjuction with the mii + When this policy is used in conjunction with the mii monitor, devices which assert link up prior to being able to actually transmit and receive are particularly susceptible to loss of the gratuitous ARP, and an @@ -585,25 +585,23 @@ mode chosen. num_grat_arp - - Specifies the number of gratuitous ARPs to be issued after a - failover event. One gratuitous ARP is issued immediately after - the failover, subsequent ARPs are sent at a rate of one per link - monitor interval (arp_interval or miimon, whichever is active). - - The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. This option - affects only the active-backup mode. This option was added for - bonding version 3.3.0. - num_unsol_na - Specifies the number of unsolicited IPv6 Neighbor Advertisements - to be issued after a failover event. One unsolicited NA is issued - immediately after the failover. - - The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. This option - affects only the active-backup mode. This option was added for - bonding version 3.4.0. + Specify the number of peer notifications (gratuitous ARPs and + unsolicited IPv6 Neighbor Advertisements) to be issued after a + failover event. As soon as the link is up on the new slave + (possibly immediately) a peer notification is sent on the + bonding device and each VLAN sub-device. This is repeated at + each link monitor interval (arp_interval or miimon, whichever + is active) if the number is greater than 1. + + The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. These options + affect only the active-backup mode. These options were added for + bonding versions 3.3.0 and 3.4.0 respectively. + + From Linux 2.6.40 and bonding version 3.7.1, these notifications + are generated by the ipv4 and ipv6 code and the numbers of + repetitions cannot be set independently. primary diff --git a/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt b/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt index 7fe7a9a33a4f..e52fd62bef3a 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/caif/Linux-CAIF.txt @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ The CAIF Protocol implementation contains: - CFMUX CAIF Mux layer. Handles multiplexing between multiple physical bearers and multiple channels such as VEI, Datagram, etc. The MUX keeps track of the existing CAIF Channels and - Physical Instances and selects the apropriate instance based + Physical Instances and selects the appropriate instance based on Channel-Id and Physical-ID. - CFFRML CAIF Framing layer. Handles Framing i.e. Frame length diff --git a/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt b/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt index 0cb8cb9098f4..9efd0687dc4c 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/caif/spi_porting.txt @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ static int sspi_init_xfer(struct cfspi_xfer *xfer, struct cfspi_dev *dev) void sspi_sig_xfer(bool xfer, struct cfspi_dev *dev) { /* If xfer is true then you should assert the SPI_INT to indicate to - * the master that you are ready to recieve the data from the master + * the master that you are ready to receive the data from the master * SPI. If xfer is false then you should de-assert SPI_INT to indicate * that the transfer is done. */ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt index 5b04b67ddca2..56ca3b75376e 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt @@ -240,7 +240,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons: the user application using the common CAN filter mechanisms. Inside this filter definition the (interested) type of errors may be selected. The reception of error frames is disabled by default. - The format of the CAN error frame is briefly decribed in the Linux + The format of the CAN error frame is briefly described in the Linux header file "include/linux/can/error.h". 4. How to use Socket CAN diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt index 23c995e64032..f41ea2405220 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ieee802154.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ The Linux-ZigBee project goal is to provide complete implementation of IEEE 802.15.4 / ZigBee / 6LoWPAN protocols. IEEE 802.15.4 is a stack of protocols for organizing Low-Rate Wireless Personal Area Networks. -Currently only IEEE 802.15.4 layer is implemented. We have choosen +Currently only IEEE 802.15.4 layer is implemented. We have chosen to use plain Berkeley socket API, the generic Linux networking stack to transfer IEEE 802.15.4 messages and a special protocol over genetlink for configuration/management diff --git a/Documentation/networking/igb.txt b/Documentation/networking/igb.txt index 98953c0d5342..9a2a037194a5 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/igb.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/igb.txt @@ -93,6 +93,19 @@ Additional Configurations REQUIREMENTS: MSI-X support is required for Multiqueue. If MSI-X is not found, the system will fallback to MSI or to Legacy interrupts. + MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature + ---------------------------------- + When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by + the hardware and not transmitted. An interrupt is sent to the PF driver + notifying it of the spoof attempt. + + When a spoofed packet is detected the PF driver will send the following + message to the system log (displayed by the "dmesg" command): + + Spoof event(s) detected on VF(n) + + Where n=the VF that attempted to do the spoofing. + Support ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt b/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt index c65a94010ea8..b95b5bf96751 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/olympic.txt @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ together. Variable MTU size: -The driver can handle a MTU size upto either 4500 or 18000 depending upon +The driver can handle a MTU size up to either 4500 or 18000 depending upon ring speed. The driver also changes the size of the receive buffers as part of the mtu re-sizing, so if you set mtu = 18000, you will need to be able to allocate 16 * (sk_buff with 18000 buffer size) call it 18500 bytes per ring diff --git a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt index 073894d1c093..4acea6603720 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ we will get the following buffer structure: A frame can be of any size with the only condition it can fit in a block. A block can only hold an integer number of frames, or in other words, a frame cannot -be spawned accross two blocks, so there are some details you have to take into +be spawned across two blocks, so there are some details you have to take into account when choosing the frame_size. See "Mapping and use of the circular buffer (ring)". diff --git a/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt b/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt index 9d4e0f4df5a8..4be0c039edbc 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ To associate an interface with a physical adapter use "ethtool -p <ethX>". The corresponding adapter's LED will blink multiple times. 3. Features supported: -a. Jumbo frames. Xframe I/II supports MTU upto 9600 bytes, +a. Jumbo frames. Xframe I/II supports MTU up to 9600 bytes, modifiable using ifconfig command. b. Offloads. Supports checksum offload(TCP/UDP/IP) on transmit @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ significant performance improvement on certain platforms(SGI Altix, IBM xSeries). d. MSI/MSI-X. Can be enabled on platforms which support this feature -(IA64, Xeon) resulting in noticeable performance improvement(upto 7% +(IA64, Xeon) resulting in noticeable performance improvement(up to 7% on certain platforms). e. Statistics. Comprehensive MAC-level and software statistics displayed diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt b/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt index dcadf6f88e34..70d6cf608251 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -The "enviromental" rules for authors of any new tc actions are: +The "environmental" rules for authors of any new tc actions are: 1) If you stealeth or borroweth any packet thou shalt be branching from the righteous path and thou shalt cloneth. @@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ this way any action downstream can stomp on the packet. 3) Dropping packets you don't own is a no-no. You simply return TC_ACT_SHOT to the caller and they will drop it. -The "enviromental" rules for callers of actions (qdiscs etc) are: +The "environmental" rules for callers of actions (qdiscs etc) are: *) Thou art responsible for freeing anything returned as being TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED. If none of TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED is diff --git a/Documentation/power/devices.txt b/Documentation/power/devices.txt index f023ba6bba62..88880839ece4 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/devices.txt @@ -279,11 +279,15 @@ When the system goes into the standby or memory sleep state, the phases are: time.) Unlike the other suspend-related phases, during the prepare phase the device tree is traversed top-down. - The prepare phase uses only a bus callback. After the callback method - returns, no new children may be registered below the device. The method - may also prepare the device or driver in some way for the upcoming - system power transition, but it should not put the device into a - low-power state. + In addition to that, if device drivers need to allocate additional + memory to be able to hadle device suspend correctly, that should be + done in the prepare phase. + + After the prepare callback method returns, no new children may be + registered below the device. The method may also prepare the device or + driver in some way for the upcoming system power transition (for + example, by allocating additional memory required for this purpose), but + it should not put the device into a low-power state. 2. The suspend methods should quiesce the device to stop it from performing I/O. They also may save the device registers and put it into the @@ -367,7 +371,7 @@ Drivers need to be able to handle hardware which has been reset since the suspend methods were called, for example by complete reinitialization. This may be the hardest part, and the one most protected by NDA'd documents and chip errata. It's simplest if the hardware state hasn't changed since -the suspend was carried out, but that can't be guaranteed (in fact, it ususally +the suspend was carried out, but that can't be guaranteed (in fact, it usually is not the case). Drivers must also be prepared to notice that the device has been removed diff --git a/Documentation/power/notifiers.txt b/Documentation/power/notifiers.txt index ae1b7ec07684..c2a4a346c0d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/notifiers.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/notifiers.txt @@ -1,46 +1,41 @@ Suspend notifiers - (C) 2007 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, GPL - -There are some operations that device drivers may want to carry out in their -.suspend() routines, but shouldn't, because they can cause the hibernation or -suspend to fail. For example, a driver may want to allocate a substantial amount -of memory (like 50 MB) in .suspend(), but that shouldn't be done after the -swsusp's memory shrinker has run. - -Also, there may be some operations, that subsystems want to carry out before a -hibernation/suspend or after a restore/resume, requiring the system to be fully -functional, so the drivers' .suspend() and .resume() routines are not suitable -for this purpose. For example, device drivers may want to upload firmware to -their devices after a restore from a hibernation image, but they cannot do it by -calling request_firmware() from their .resume() routines (user land processes -are frozen at this point). The solution may be to load the firmware into -memory before processes are frozen and upload it from there in the .resume() -routine. Of course, a hibernation notifier may be used for this purpose. - -The subsystems that have such needs can register suspend notifiers that will be -called upon the following events by the suspend core: + (C) 2007-2011 Rafael J. Wysocki <rjw@sisk.pl>, GPL + +There are some operations that subsystems or drivers may want to carry out +before hibernation/suspend or after restore/resume, but they require the system +to be fully functional, so the drivers' and subsystems' .suspend() and .resume() +or even .prepare() and .complete() callbacks are not suitable for this purpose. +For example, device drivers may want to upload firmware to their devices after +resume/restore, but they cannot do it by calling request_firmware() from their +.resume() or .complete() routines (user land processes are frozen at these +points). The solution may be to load the firmware into memory before processes +are frozen and upload it from there in the .resume() routine. +A suspend/hibernation notifier may be used for this purpose. + +The subsystems or drivers having such needs can register suspend notifiers that +will be called upon the following events by the PM core: PM_HIBERNATION_PREPARE The system is going to hibernate or suspend, tasks will be frozen immediately. PM_POST_HIBERNATION The system memory state has been restored from a - hibernation image or an error occured during the - hibernation. Device drivers' .resume() callbacks have + hibernation image or an error occurred during + hibernation. Device drivers' restore callbacks have been executed and tasks have been thawed. PM_RESTORE_PREPARE The system is going to restore a hibernation image. - If all goes well the restored kernel will issue a + If all goes well, the restored kernel will issue a PM_POST_HIBERNATION notification. -PM_POST_RESTORE An error occurred during the hibernation restore. - Device drivers' .resume() callbacks have been executed +PM_POST_RESTORE An error occurred during restore from hibernation. + Device drivers' restore callbacks have been executed and tasks have been thawed. -PM_SUSPEND_PREPARE The system is preparing for a suspend. +PM_SUSPEND_PREPARE The system is preparing for suspend. -PM_POST_SUSPEND The system has just resumed or an error occured during - the suspend. Device drivers' .resume() callbacks have - been executed and tasks have been thawed. +PM_POST_SUSPEND The system has just resumed or an error occurred during + suspend. Device drivers' resume callbacks have been + executed and tasks have been thawed. It is generally assumed that whatever the notifiers do for PM_HIBERNATION_PREPARE, should be undone for PM_POST_HIBERNATION. Analogously, diff --git a/Documentation/power/opp.txt b/Documentation/power/opp.txt index cd445582d1f8..5ae70a12c1e2 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/opp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/opp.txt @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ opp_find_freq_ceil - Search for an available OPP which is *at least* the if (!IS_ERR(opp)) soc_switch_to_freq_voltage(freq); else - /* do something when we cant satisfy the req */ + /* do something when we can't satisfy the req */ /* do other stuff */ } diff --git a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt index ea718891a665..ac190cf1963e 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/swsusp.txt @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Q: There don't seem to be any generally useful behavioral distinctions between SUSPEND and FREEZE. A: Doing SUSPEND when you are asked to do FREEZE is always correct, -but it may be unneccessarily slow. If you want your driver to stay simple, +but it may be unnecessarily slow. If you want your driver to stay simple, slowness may not matter to you. It can always be fixed later. For devices like disk it does matter, you do not want to spindown for @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ disk. Whole sequence goes like running system, user asks for suspend-to-disk - user processes are stopped (in common case there are none, but with resume-from-initrd, noone knows) + user processes are stopped (in common case there are none, but with resume-from-initrd, no one knows) read image from disk diff --git a/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt b/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt index 81680f9f5909..1101bee4e822 100644 --- a/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt +++ b/Documentation/power/userland-swsusp.txt @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ SNAPSHOT_S2RAM - suspend to RAM; using this call causes the kernel to The device's read() operation can be used to transfer the snapshot image from the kernel. It has the following limitations: - you cannot read() more than one virtual memory page at a time -- read()s accross page boundaries are impossible (ie. if ypu read() 1/2 of +- read()s across page boundaries are impossible (ie. if ypu read() 1/2 of a page in the previous call, you will only be able to read() _at_ _most_ 1/2 of the page in the next call) @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ mechanism and the userland utilities using the interface SHOULD use additional means, such as checksums, to ensure the integrity of the snapshot image. The suspending and resuming utilities MUST lock themselves in memory, -preferrably using mlockall(), before calling SNAPSHOT_FREEZE. +preferably using mlockall(), before calling SNAPSHOT_FREEZE. The suspending utility MUST check the value stored by SNAPSHOT_CREATE_IMAGE in the memory location pointed to by the last argument of ioctl() and proceed @@ -147,7 +147,7 @@ in accordance with it: (a) The suspending utility MUST NOT close the snapshot device _unless_ the whole suspend procedure is to be cancelled, in which case, if the snapshot image has already been saved, the - suspending utility SHOULD destroy it, preferrably by zapping + suspending utility SHOULD destroy it, preferably by zapping its header. If the suspend is not to be cancelled, the system MUST be powered off or rebooted after the snapshot image has been saved. diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt index 6d8be3468d7d..a730ca5a07f8 100644 --- a/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt +++ b/Documentation/powerpc/hvcs.txt @@ -528,7 +528,7 @@ this driver assignment of hotplug added vty-servers may be in a different order than how they would be exposed on module load. Rebooting or reloading the module after dynamic addition may result in the /dev/hvcs* and vty-server coupling changing if a vty-server adapter was added in a -slot inbetween two other vty-server adapters. Refer to the section above +slot between two other vty-server adapters. Refer to the section above on how to determine which vty-server goes with which /dev/hvcs* node. Hint; look at the sysfs "index" attribute for the vty-server. diff --git a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt index 86f9f74b2b34..efe998becc5b 100644 --- a/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt +++ b/Documentation/s390/Debugging390.txt @@ -2273,7 +2273,7 @@ IP forwarding is on. There is a lot of useful info in here best found by going in & having a look around, so I'll take you through some entries I consider important. -All the processes running on the machine have there own entry defined by +All the processes running on the machine have their own entry defined by /proc/<pid> So lets have a look at the init process cd /proc/1 diff --git a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt index 373ceacc367e..b7ee379b651b 100644 --- a/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt +++ b/Documentation/scheduler/sched-domains.txt @@ -1,8 +1,7 @@ -Each CPU has a "base" scheduling domain (struct sched_domain). These are -accessed via cpu_sched_domain(i) and this_sched_domain() macros. The domain +Each CPU has a "base" scheduling domain (struct sched_domain). The domain hierarchy is built from these base domains via the ->parent pointer. ->parent -MUST be NULL terminated, and domain structures should be per-CPU as they -are locklessly updated. +MUST be NULL terminated, and domain structures should be per-CPU as they are +locklessly updated. Each scheduling domain spans a number of CPUs (stored in the ->span field). A domain's span MUST be a superset of it child's span (this restriction could @@ -26,11 +25,26 @@ is treated as one entity. The load of a group is defined as the sum of the load of each of its member CPUs, and only when the load of a group becomes out of balance are tasks moved between groups. -In kernel/sched.c, rebalance_tick is run periodically on each CPU. This -function takes its CPU's base sched domain and checks to see if has reached -its rebalance interval. If so, then it will run load_balance on that domain. -rebalance_tick then checks the parent sched_domain (if it exists), and the -parent of the parent and so forth. +In kernel/sched.c, trigger_load_balance() is run periodically on each CPU +through scheduler_tick(). It raises a softirq after the next regularly scheduled +rebalancing event for the current runqueue has arrived. The actual load +balancing workhorse, run_rebalance_domains()->rebalance_domains(), is then run +in softirq context (SCHED_SOFTIRQ). + +The latter function takes two arguments: the current CPU and whether it was idle +at the time the scheduler_tick() happened and iterates over all sched domains +our CPU is on, starting from its base domain and going up the ->parent chain. +While doing that, it checks to see if the current domain has exhausted its +rebalance interval. If so, it runs load_balance() on that domain. It then checks +the parent sched_domain (if it exists), and the parent of the parent and so +forth. + +Initially, load_balance() finds the busiest group in the current sched domain. +If it succeeds, it looks for the busiest runqueue of all the CPUs' runqueues in +that group. If it manages to find such a runqueue, it locks both our initial +CPU's runqueue and the newly found busiest one and starts moving tasks from it +to our runqueue. The exact number of tasks amounts to an imbalance previously +computed while iterating over this sched domain's groups. *** Implementing sched domains *** The "base" domain will "span" the first level of the hierarchy. In the case diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc index 5e83769c6aa9..c56ec99d7b2f 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.lpfc @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Changes from 20041229 to 20050110 lpfc_scsiport.c * In remote port changes: no longer nulling target->pnode when removing from mapped list. Pnode get nulled when the node is - freed (after nodev tmo). This bug was causing i/o recieved in + freed (after nodev tmo). This bug was causing i/o received in the small window while the device was blocked to be errored w/ did_no_connect. With the fix, it returns host_busy (per the pre-remote port changes). @@ -530,7 +530,7 @@ Changes from 20041018 to 20041123 coherent mappings. Note: There are more consistent mappings that are using pci_dma_sync calls. Probably these should be removed as well. - * Modified lpfc_free_scsi_buf to accomodate all three scsi_buf + * Modified lpfc_free_scsi_buf to accommodate all three scsi_buf free types to alleviate miscellaneous panics with cable pull testing. * Set hotplug to default 0 and lpfc_target_remove to not remove @@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ Changes from 20041018 to 20041123 included more than once. * Replaced "set_current_state(TASK_UNINTERRUPTIBLE); schedule_timeout(timeout)" with "msleep(timeout)". - * Fixnode was loosing starget when rediscovered. We saw messages + * Fixnode was losing starget when rediscovered. We saw messages like: lpfc 0000:04:02.0: 0:0263 Cannot block scsi target as a result. Moved starget field into struct lpfc_target which is referenced from the node. @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ Changes from 20041018 to 20041123 * Make 3 functions static: lpfc_get_hba_sym_node_name, lpfc_intr_prep and lpfc_setup_slim_access. Move lpfc_intr_prep and lpfc_setup_slim_access so they're defined before being used. - * Remove an unecessary list_del() in lpfc_hbadisc.c. + * Remove an unnecessary list_del() in lpfc_hbadisc.c. * Set nlp_state before calling lpfc_nlp_list() since this will potentially call fc_target_unblock which may cause a race in queuecommand by releasing host_lock. @@ -753,7 +753,7 @@ Changes from 20040908 to 20040920 * Changed version number to 8.0.12 * Removed used #defines: DEFAULT_PCI_LATENCY_CLOCKS and PCI_LATENCY_VALUE from lpfc_hw.h. - * Changes to accomodate rnid. + * Changes to accommodate rnid. * Fix RSCN handling so RSCN NS queries only effect NPorts found in RSCN data. * If we rcv a plogi on a NPort queued up for discovery, clear the @@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ Changes from 20040908 to 20040920 counter instead, brd_no isn't reused anymore. Also some tiny whitespace cleanups in surrounding code. * Reorder functions in lpfc_els.c to remove need for prototypes. - * Removed unsed prototypes from lpfc_crtn.h - + * Removed unused prototypes from lpfc_crtn.h - lpfc_ip_timeout_handler, lpfc_read_pci and lpfc_revoke. * Removed some unused prototypes from lpfc_crtn.h - lpfc_scsi_hba_reset, lpfc_scsi_issue_inqsn, @@ -863,7 +863,7 @@ Changes from 20040823 to 20040908 * Minimal support for SCSI flat space addressing/volume set addressing. Use 16 bits of LUN address so that flat addressing/VSA will work. - * Changed 2 occurences of if( 1 != f(x)) to if(f(x) != 1) + * Changed 2 occurrences of if( 1 != f(x)) to if(f(x) != 1) * Drop include of lpfc_cfgparm.h. * Reduce stack usage of lpfc_fdmi_cmd in lpfc_ct.c. * Add minimum range checking property to /sys write/store @@ -1449,7 +1449,7 @@ Changes from 20040402 to 20040409 * Removed lpfc_els_chk_latt from the lpfc_config_post function. lpfc_els_chk_latt will enable the link event interrupts when flogi is pending which causes two discovery state machines - running parallely. + running parallelly. * Add pci_disable_device to unload path. * Move lpfc_sleep_event from lpfc_fcp.c to lpfc_util_ioctl.c * Call dma_map_single() & pci_map_single() directly instead of via @@ -1590,7 +1590,7 @@ Changes from 20040326 to 20040402 ELX_WRITE_HS ELX_WRITE_HA ELX_WRITE_CA ELX_READ_HC ELX_READ_HS ELX_READ_HA ELX_READ_CA ELX_READ_MB ELX_RESET ELX_READ_HBA ELX_INSTANCE ELX_LIP. Also introduced - attribute "set" to be used in conjuction with the above + attribute "set" to be used in conjunction with the above attributes. * Removed DLINK, enque and deque declarations now that clock doesn't use them anymore diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid index 5e07d320817d..d2052fdbedd2 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.megaraid @@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ Older Version : 2.20.4.6 (scsi module), 2.20.2.6 (cmm module) 1. Sorted out PCI IDs to remove megaraid support overlaps. Based on the patch from Daniel, sorted out PCI IDs along with - charactor node name change from 'megadev' to 'megadev_legacy' to avoid + character node name change from 'megadev' to 'megadev_legacy' to avoid conflict. --- Hopefully we'll be getting the build restriction zapped much sooner, diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx index 8b278c10edfd..9288e3d8974a 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.ncr53c8xx @@ -200,7 +200,7 @@ Sun Feb 14:00 1999 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) By default the driver uses both IRQF_SHARED and IRQF_DISABLED. Option 'ncr53c8xx=irqm:0x20' may be used when an IRQ is shared by a 53C8XX adapter and a network board. - - Tiny mispelling fixed (ABORT instead of ABRT). Was fortunately + - Tiny misspelling fixed (ABORT instead of ABRT). Was fortunately harmless. - Negotiate SYNC data transfers with CCS devices. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx index 02ffbc1e8a84..c1933707d0bc 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ChangeLog.sym53c8xx @@ -457,7 +457,7 @@ Fri Jan 1 20:00 1999 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) Sat Dec 19 21:00 1998 Gerard Roudier (groudier@club-internet.fr) * version sym53c8xx-1.0 - Define some new IO registers for the 896 (istat1, mbox0, mbox1) - - Revamp slighly the Symbios NVRAM lay-out based on the excerpt of + - Revamp slightly the Symbios NVRAM lay-out based on the excerpt of the header file I received from Symbios. - Check the PCI bus number for the boot order (Using a fast PCI controller behing a PCI-PCI bridge seems sub-optimal). diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx index 9e15b4f9cd28..19e7cd4bba66 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx +++ b/Documentation/scsi/LICENSE.qla2xxx @@ -1,11 +1,11 @@ -Copyright (c) 2003-2005 QLogic Corporation -QLogic Linux Fibre Channel HBA Driver +Copyright (c) 2003-2011 QLogic Corporation +QLogic Linux/ESX Fibre Channel HBA Driver -This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6 that may be +This program includes a device driver for Linux 2.6/ESX that may be distributed with QLogic hardware specific firmware binary file. You may modify and redistribute the device driver code under the -GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software -Foundation (version 2 or a later version). +GNU General Public License (a copy of which is attached hereto as +Exhibit A) published by the Free Software Foundation (version 2). You may redistribute the hardware specific firmware binary file under the following terms: @@ -43,3 +43,285 @@ OTHERWISE IN ANY INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (PATENT, COPYRIGHT, TRADE SECRET, MASK WORK, OR OTHER PROPRIETARY RIGHT) EMBODIED IN ANY OTHER QLOGIC HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE EITHER SOLELY OR IN COMBINATION WITH THIS PROGRAM. + + +EXHIBIT A + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + Version 2, June 1991 + + Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA + Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies + of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. + + Preamble + + The licenses for most software are designed to take away your +freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public +License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free +software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This +General Public License applies to most of the Free Software +Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to +using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by +the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to +your programs, too. + + When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not +price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you +have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for +this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it +if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it +in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. + + To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid +anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. +These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you +distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. + + For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether +gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that +you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the +source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their +rights. + + We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and +(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, +distribute and/or modify the software. + + Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain +that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free +software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we +want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so +that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original +authors' reputations. + + Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software +patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free +program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the +program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any +patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. + + The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and +modification follow. + + GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE + TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION + + 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains +a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed +under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, +refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" +means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: +that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, +either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another +language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in +the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". + +Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not +covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of +running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program +is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the +Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). +Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. + + 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's +source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you +conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate +copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the +notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; +and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License +along with the Program. + +You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and +you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. + + 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion +of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and +distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 +above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: + + a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices + stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. + + b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in + whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any + part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third + parties under the terms of this License. + + c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively + when run, you must cause it, when started running for such + interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an + announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a + notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide + a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under + these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this + License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but + does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on + the Program is not required to print an announcement.) + +These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If +identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, +and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in +themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those +sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you +distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based +on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of +this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the +entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. + +Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest +your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to +exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or +collective works based on the Program. + +In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program +with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of +a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under +the scope of this License. + + 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, +under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of +Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: + + a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable + source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections + 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, + + b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three + years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your + cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete + machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be + distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium + customarily used for software interchange; or, + + c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer + to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is + allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you + received the program in object code or executable form with such + an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) + +The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for +making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source +code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any +associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to +control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a +special exception, the source code distributed need not include +anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary +form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the +operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component +itself accompanies the executable. + +If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering +access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent +access to copy the source code from the same place counts as +distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not +compelled to copy the source along with the object code. + + 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program +except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt +otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is +void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. +However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under +this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such +parties remain in full compliance. + + 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not +signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or +distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are +prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by +modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the +Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and +all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying +the Program or works based on it. + + 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the +Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the +original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to +these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further +restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. +You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to +this License. + + 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent +infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), +conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or +otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not +excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot +distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this +License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you +may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent +license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by +all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then +the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to +refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. + +If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under +any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to +apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other +circumstances. + +It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any +patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any +such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the +integrity of the free software distribution system, which is +implemented by public license practices. Many people have made +generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed +through that system in reliance on consistent application of that +system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing +to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot +impose that choice. + +This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to +be a consequence of the rest of this License. + + 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in +certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the +original copyright holder who places the Program under this License +may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding +those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among +countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates +the limitation as if written in the body of this License. + + 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions +of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will +be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to +address new problems or concerns. + +Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program +specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any +later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions +either of that version or of any later version published by the Free +Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of +this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software +Foundation. + + 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free +programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author +to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free +Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes +make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals +of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and +of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. + + NO WARRANTY + + 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY +FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN +OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES +PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED +OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF +MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS +TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE +PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, +REPAIR OR CORRECTION. + + 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING +WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR +REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, +INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING +OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED +TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY +YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER +PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt index 29ce6d87e451..94848734ac66 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/aha152x.txt @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ in the partition table and therefore every operating system has to know the right geometry to be able to interpret it. Moreover there are certain limitations to the C/H/S addressing scheme, -namely the address space is limited to upto 255 heads, upto 63 sectors +namely the address space is limited to up to 255 heads, up to 63 sectors and a maximum of 1023 cylinders. The AHA-1522 BIOS calculates the geometry by fixing the number of heads diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt b/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt index 16e054c9c70b..64ac7093c872 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/aic79xx.txt @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: Option: tag_info:{{value[,value...]}[,{value[,value...]}...]} Definition: Set the per-target tagged queue depth on a per controller basis. Both controllers and targets - may be ommitted indicating that they should retain + may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default tag depth. Examples: tag_info:{{16,32,32,64,8,8,,32,32,32,32,32,32,32,32,32} On Controller 0 @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: The rd_strm_bitmask is a 16 bit hex value in which each bit represents a target. Setting the target's bit to '1' enables read streaming for that - target. Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + target. Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default read streaming setting. Example: rd_strm:{0x0041} On Controller 0 @@ -313,7 +313,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: ----------------------------------------------------------------- Option: dv: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set Domain Validation Policy on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default read streaming setting. Example: dv:{-1,0,,1,1,0} On Controller 0 leave DV at its default setting. @@ -340,7 +340,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: Option: precomp: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set IO Cell precompensation value on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default precompensation setting. Example: precomp:{0x1} On Controller 0 set precompensation to 1. @@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: ----------------------------------------------------------------- Option: slewrate: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set IO Cell slew rate on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default slew rate setting. Example: slewrate:{0x1} On Controller 0 set slew rate to 1. @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ The following information is available in this file: ----------------------------------------------------------------- Option: amplitude: {value[,value...]} Definition: Set IO Cell signal amplitude on a per-controller basis. - Controllers may be ommitted indicating that + Controllers may be omitted indicating that they should retain the default read streaming setting. Example: amplitude:{0x1} On Controller 0 set amplitude to 1. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt index 45d61ad8c6f7..ac41a9fcac77 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt @@ -303,7 +303,7 @@ (scb) and calls a local function issue_cmd(), which writes a scb command into subsystem I/O ports. Once the scb command is carried out, the interrupt_handler() is invoked. If a device is determined to be - existant and it has not assigned any ldn, it gets one dynamically. + existent and it has not assigned any ldn, it gets one dynamically. For this, the whole stuff is done in ibmmca_queuecommand(). 2.6 Abort & Reset Commands @@ -741,7 +741,7 @@ some error appeared, else it is undefined. Now, this is fixed. Before any SCB command gets queued, the tsb.dev_status is set to 0, so the cmd->result won't screw up Linux higher level drivers. - 2) The reset-function has slightly improved. This is still planed for + 2) The reset-function has slightly improved. This is still planned for abort. During the abort and the reset function, no interrupts are allowed. This is however quite hard to cope with, so the INT-status register is read. When the interrupt gets queued, one can find its diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt index 032399b16a53..ade046ea7c17 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi-changer.txt @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Trouble? If you insmod the driver with "insmod debug=1", it will be verbose and prints a lot of stuff to the syslog. Compiling the kernel with -CONFIG_SCSI_CONSTANTS=y improves the quality of the error messages alot +CONFIG_SCSI_CONSTANTS=y improves the quality of the error messages a lot because the kernel will translate the error codes into human-readable strings then. diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt index 7acbebb17fa6..6ff16b620d84 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_eh.txt @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ scmd->allowed. SCSI transports/LLDDs automatically acquire sense data on command failures (autosense). Autosense is recommended for performance reasons and as sense information could get out of - sync inbetween occurrence of CHECK CONDITION and this action. + sync between occurrence of CHECK CONDITION and this action. Note that if autosense is not supported, scmd->sense_buffer contains invalid sense data when error-completing the scmd diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt index e00192de4d1c..f79282fc48d7 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt @@ -291,7 +291,7 @@ Transport <-> LLDD Interfaces : Vport support by LLDD: The LLDD indicates support for vports by supplying a vport_create() - function in the transport template. The presense of this function will + function in the transport template. The presence of this function will cause the creation of the new attributes on the fc_host. As part of the physical port completing its initialization relative to the transport, it should set the max_npiv_vports attribute to indicate the diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/sym53c8xx_2.txt b/Documentation/scsi/sym53c8xx_2.txt index 6f63b7989679..6af8f7a7770f 100644 --- a/Documentation/scsi/sym53c8xx_2.txt +++ b/Documentation/scsi/sym53c8xx_2.txt @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ from the driver. 7. Profiling information -This driver does not provide profiling informations as did its predecessors. +This driver does not provide profiling information as did its predecessors. This feature was not this useful and added complexity to the code. As the driver code got more complex, I have decided to remove everything that didn't seem actually useful. diff --git a/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio b/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio index d10443918684..5d2a33be0bd8 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio +++ b/Documentation/serial/moxa-smartio @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ Content spd_normal Use 38.4kb when the application requests 38.4kb. spd_cust Use the custom divisor to set the speed when the application requests 38.4kb. - divisor This option set the custom divison. + divisor This option set the custom division. baud_base This option set the base baud rate. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt index 397f41a1f153..a5d91126a8f7 100644 --- a/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt +++ b/Documentation/serial/n_gsm.txt @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Major parts of the initialization program : /* configure the serial port : speed, flow control ... */ /* send the AT commands to switch the modem to CMUX mode - and check that it's succesful (should return OK) */ + and check that it's successful (should return OK) */ write(fd, "AT+CMUX=0\r", 10); /* experience showed that some modems need some time before diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt index 3c1eddd9fcc7..9822afb6313c 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/ALSA-Configuration.txt @@ -322,7 +322,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. "port" needs to match the BASE ADDRESS jumper on the card (0x220 or 0x240) or the value stored in the card's EEPROM for cards that have an EEPROM and their "CONFIG MODE" jumper set to "EEPROM SETTING". The other values can - be choosen freely from the options enumerated above. + be chosen freely from the options enumerated above. If dma2 is specified and different from dma1, the card will operate in full-duplex mode. When dma1=3, only dma2=0 is valid and the only way to @@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ Prior to version 0.9.0rc4 options had a 'snd_' prefix. This was removed. "port" needs to match the BASE ADDRESS jumper on the card (0x220 or 0x240) or the value stored in the card's EEPROM for cards that have an EEPROM and their "CONFIG MODE" jumper set to "EEPROM SETTING". The other values can - be choosen freely from the options enumerated above. + be chosen freely from the options enumerated above. If dma2 is specified and different from dma1, the card will operate in full-duplex mode. When dma1=3, only dma2=0 is valid and the only way to @@ -2229,7 +2229,7 @@ Proc interfaces (/proc/asound) /proc/asound/card#/pcm#[cp]/oss ------------------------------- - String "erase" - erase all additional informations about OSS applications + String "erase" - erase all additional information about OSS applications String "<app_name> <fragments> <fragment_size> [<options>]" <app_name> - name of application with (higher priority) or without path diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/SB-Live-mixer.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/SB-Live-mixer.txt index f5639d40521d..f4b5988f450c 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/SB-Live-mixer.txt +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/SB-Live-mixer.txt @@ -87,14 +87,14 @@ accumulator. ALSA uses accumulators 0 and 1 for left and right PCM. The result is forwarded to the ADC capture FIFO (thus to the standard capture PCM device). -name='Music Playback Volume',index=0 +name='Synth Playback Volume',index=0 This control is used to attenuate samples for left and right MIDI FX-bus accumulators. ALSA uses accumulators 4 and 5 for left and right MIDI samples. The result samples are forwarded to the front DAC PCM slots of the AC97 codec. -name='Music Capture Volume',index=0 -name='Music Capture Switch',index=0 +name='Synth Capture Volume',index=0 +name='Synth Capture Switch',index=0 These controls are used to attenuate samples for left and right MIDI FX-bus accumulator. ALSA uses accumulators 4 and 5 for left and right PCM. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/AudioExcelDSP16 b/Documentation/sound/oss/AudioExcelDSP16 index c0f08922993b..e0dc0641b480 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/oss/AudioExcelDSP16 +++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/AudioExcelDSP16 @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ Driver ------ -Informations about Audio Excel DSP 16 driver can be found in the source +Information about Audio Excel DSP 16 driver can be found in the source file aedsp16.c Please, read the head of the source before using it. It contain useful -informations. +information. Configuration ------------- @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Sound cards supported This driver supports the SC-6000 and SC-6600 based Gallant's sound card. It don't support the Audio Excel DSP 16 III (try the SC-6600 code). I'm working on the III version of the card: if someone have useful -informations about it, please let me know. +information about it, please let me know. For all the non-supported audio cards, you have to boot MS-DOS (or WIN95) activating the audio card with the MS-DOS device driver, then you have to <ctrl>-<alt>-<del> and boot Linux. diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/README.OSS b/Documentation/sound/oss/README.OSS index c615debbf08d..4be259428a1c 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/oss/README.OSS +++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/README.OSS @@ -1352,7 +1352,7 @@ OSS-mixer. The PCM20 contains a radio tuner, which is also controlled by ACI. This radio tuner is supported by the ACI driver together with the miropcm20.o module. Also the 7-band equalizer is integrated -(limited by the OSS-design). Developement has started and maybe +(limited by the OSS-design). Development has started and maybe finished for the RDS decoder on this card, too. You will be able to read RadioText, the Programme Service name, Programme TYpe and others. Even the v4l radio module benefits from it with a refined diff --git a/Documentation/sound/oss/README.ymfsb b/Documentation/sound/oss/README.ymfsb index af8a7d3a4e8e..b6b77906b58d 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/oss/README.ymfsb +++ b/Documentation/sound/oss/README.ymfsb @@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ FIRST OF ALL ============ This code references YAMAHA's sample codes and data sheets. - I respect and thank for all people they made open the informations + I respect and thank for all people they made open the information about YMF7xx cards. And this codes heavily based on Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>'s diff --git a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx index 68a4fe3818a1..493dada57372 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx +++ b/Documentation/spi/pxa2xx @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ configured to use SSPFRM instead. NOTE: the SPI driver cannot control the chip select if SSPFRM is used, so the chipselect is dropped after each spi_transfer. Most devices need chip select asserted around the complete message. Use SSPFRM as a GPIO (through cs_control) -to accomodate these chips. +to accommodate these chips. NSSP SLAVE SAMPLE diff --git a/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp b/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp index 34a9cfd746bd..463f6d01fa15 100644 --- a/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp +++ b/Documentation/spi/spi-lm70llp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ The hardware interfacing on the LM70 LLP eval board is as follows: Note that since the LM70 uses a "3-wire" variant of SPI, the SI/SO pin is connected to both pin D7 (as Master Out) and Select (as Master In) -using an arrangment that lets either the parport or the LM70 pull the +using an arrangement that lets either the parport or the LM70 pull the pin low. This can't be shared with true SPI devices, but other 3-wire devices might share the same SI/SO pin. diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt index cbd05ffc606b..3201a7097e4d 100644 --- a/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt +++ b/Documentation/sysctl/net.txt @@ -32,6 +32,17 @@ Table : Subdirectories in /proc/sys/net 1. /proc/sys/net/core - Network core options ------------------------------------------------------- +bpf_jit_enable +-------------- + +This enables Berkeley Packet Filter Just in Time compiler. +Currently supported on x86_64 architecture, bpf_jit provides a framework +to speed packet filtering, the one used by tcpdump/libpcap for example. +Values : + 0 - disable the JIT (default value) + 1 - enable the JIT + 2 - enable the JIT and ask the compiler to emit traces on kernel log. + rmem_default ------------ diff --git a/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt b/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt index 4fb314d51702..db94fb6c5678 100644 --- a/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt +++ b/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ be removed to protect the rights of others. Specifically, very old Internet PhoneJACK cards have non-standard G.723.1 codecs (due to the early nature of the DSPs in those days). The auto-conversion code to bring those cards into compliance with -todays standards is available as a binary only module to those people +today's standards is available as a binary only module to those people needing it. If you bought your card after 1997 or so, you are OK - it's only the very old cards that are affected. diff --git a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt index 6d27ab8d6e9f..c83bd6b4e6e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/kprobetrace.txt @@ -120,7 +120,6 @@ format: field:unsigned char common_flags; offset:2; size:1; signed:0; field:unsigned char common_preempt_count; offset:3; size:1;signed:0; field:int common_pid; offset:4; size:4; signed:1; - field:int common_lock_depth; offset:8; size:4; signed:1; field:unsigned long __probe_ip; offset:12; size:4; signed:0; field:int __probe_nargs; offset:16; size:4; signed:1; diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt b/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt index d299ff31df57..7d350b496585 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ with the previous write. |written | +---------+ |written | - +---------+ <--- next positon for write (current commit) + +---------+ <--- next position for write (current commit) | empty | +---------+ diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/README.pvrusb2 b/Documentation/video4linux/README.pvrusb2 index a747200fe67c..2137b589276b 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/README.pvrusb2 +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/README.pvrusb2 @@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ Source file list / functional overview: to provide a streaming API usable by a read() system call style of I/O. Right now this is the only layer on top of pvrusb2-io.[ch], however the underlying architecture here was intended to allow for - other styles of I/O to be implemented with additonal modules, like + other styles of I/O to be implemented with additional modules, like mmap()'ed buffers or something even more exotic. pvrusb2-main.c - This is the top level of the driver. Module level diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options index bbe3ed667d91..14c065fa23ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Insmod-options @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ -Note: "modinfo <module>" prints various informations about a kernel +Note: "modinfo <module>" prints various information about a kernel module, among them a complete and up-to-date list of insmod options. This list tends to be outdated because it is updated manually ... diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README index 3a367cdb664e..7cbf4fb6cf31 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ If you have trouble with some specific TV card, try to ask there instead of mailing me directly. The chance that someone with the same card listens there is much higher... -For problems with sound: There are alot of different systems used +For problems with sound: There are a lot of different systems used for TV sound all over the world. And there are also different chips which decode the audio signal. Reports about sound problems ("stereo does'nt work") are pretty useless unless you include some details diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README.freeze b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README.freeze index 4259dccc8287..5eddfa076cfb 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README.freeze +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/README.freeze @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ state is stuck. I've seen reports that bttv 0.7.x crashes whereas 0.8.x works rock solid for some people. Thus probably a small buglet left somewhere in bttv -0.7.x. I have no idea where exactly, it works stable for me and alot of +0.7.x. I have no idea where exactly, it works stable for me and a lot of other people. But in case you have problems with the 0.7.x versions you can give 0.8.x a try ... diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Sound-FAQ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Sound-FAQ index 1e6328f91083..395f6c6fdd98 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Sound-FAQ +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/bttv/Sound-FAQ @@ -2,13 +2,13 @@ bttv and sound mini howto ========================= -There are alot of different bt848/849/878/879 based boards available. +There are a lot of different bt848/849/878/879 based boards available. Making video work often is not a big deal, because this is handled completely by the bt8xx chip, which is common on all boards. But sound is handled in slightly different ways on each board. To handle the grabber boards correctly, there is a array tvcards[] in -bttv-cards.c, which holds the informations required for each board. +bttv-cards.c, which holds the information required for each board. Sound will work only, if the correct entry is used (for video it often makes no difference). The bttv driver prints a line to the kernel log, telling which card type is used. Like this one: diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/et61x251.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/et61x251.txt index 1247566c4de3..e0cdae491858 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/et61x251.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/et61x251.txt @@ -191,10 +191,10 @@ Syntax: <n> Description: Debugging information level, from 0 to 3: 0 = none (use carefully) 1 = critical errors - 2 = significant informations + 2 = significant information 3 = more verbose messages Level 3 is useful for testing only, when only one device - is used at the same time. It also shows some more informations + is used at the same time. It also shows some more information about the hardware being detected. This module parameter can be changed at runtime thanks to the /sys filesystem interface. Default: 2 diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/pxa_camera.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/pxa_camera.txt index 4f6d0ca01956..51ed1578b0e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/pxa_camera.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/pxa_camera.txt @@ -84,12 +84,12 @@ DMA usage transfer is not started. On "End Of Frame" interrupt, the irq handler starts the DMA chain. - capture of one videobuffer - The DMA chain starts transfering data into videobuffer RAM pages. - When all pages are transfered, the DMA irq is raised on "ENDINTR" status + The DMA chain starts transferring data into videobuffer RAM pages. + When all pages are transferred, the DMA irq is raised on "ENDINTR" status - finishing one videobuffer The DMA irq handler marks the videobuffer as "done", and removes it from the active running queue - Meanwhile, the next videobuffer (if there is one), is transfered by DMA + Meanwhile, the next videobuffer (if there is one), is transferred by DMA - finishing the last videobuffer On the DMA irq of the last videobuffer, the QCI is stopped. @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ DMA usage This structure is pointed by dma->sg_cpu. The descriptors are used as follows : - - desc-sg[i]: i-th descriptor, transfering the i-th sg + - desc-sg[i]: i-th descriptor, transferring the i-th sg element to the video buffer scatter gather - finisher: has ddadr=DADDR_STOP, dcmd=ENDIRQEN - linker: has ddadr= desc-sg[0] of next video buffer, dcmd=0 diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/sh_mobile_ceu_camera.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/sh_mobile_ceu_camera.txt index cb47e723af74..1e96ce6e2d2f 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/sh_mobile_ceu_camera.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/sh_mobile_ceu_camera.txt @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Generic scaling / cropping scheme -1'- In the above chart minuses and slashes represent "real" data amounts, points and -accents represent "useful" data, basically, CEU scaled amd cropped output, +accents represent "useful" data, basically, CEU scaled and cropped output, mapped back onto the client's source plane. Such a configuration can be produced by user requests: @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Do not touch input rectangle - it is already optimal. 1. Calculate current sensor scales: - scale_s = ((3') - (3)) / ((2') - (2)) + scale_s = ((2') - (2)) / ((3') - (3)) 2. Calculate "effective" input crop (sensor subwindow) - CEU crop scaled back at current sensor scales onto input window - this is user S_CROP: @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ window: 4. Calculate sensor output window by applying combined scales to real input window: - width_s_out = ((2') - (2)) / scale_comb + width_s_out = ((7') - (7)) = ((2') - (2)) / scale_comb 5. Apply iterative sensor S_FMT for sensor output window. diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt index 73de4050d637..b4f67040403a 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt @@ -214,10 +214,10 @@ Syntax: <n> Description: Debugging information level, from 0 to 3: 0 = none (use carefully) 1 = critical errors - 2 = significant informations + 2 = significant information 3 = more verbose messages Level 3 is useful for testing only. It also shows some more - informations about the hardware being detected. + information about the hardware being detected. This parameter can be changed at runtime thanks to the /sys filesystem interface. Default: 2 diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt index 3b15608ee070..cf21f7aae976 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/v4l2-framework.txt @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ ignored. If you want to check for errors use this: err = v4l2_device_call_until_err(v4l2_dev, 0, core, g_chip_ident, &chip); Any error except -ENOIOCTLCMD will exit the loop with that error. If no -errors (except -ENOIOCTLCMD) occured, then 0 is returned. +errors (except -ENOIOCTLCMD) occurred, then 0 is returned. The second argument to both calls is a group ID. If 0, then all subdevs are called. If non-zero, then only those whose group ID match that value will diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt index 05138e8aea07..9649450f3b90 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt @@ -413,7 +413,7 @@ Syntax: <n> Description: Debugging information level, from 0 to 6: 0 = none (use carefully) 1 = critical errors - 2 = significant informations + 2 = significant information 3 = configuration or general messages 4 = warnings 5 = called functions diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt index befdfdacdc5b..b41c83cf09f4 100644 --- a/Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt +++ b/Documentation/video4linux/zc0301.txt @@ -181,10 +181,10 @@ Syntax: <n> Description: Debugging information level, from 0 to 3: 0 = none (use carefully) 1 = critical errors - 2 = significant informations + 2 = significant information 3 = more verbose messages Level 3 is useful for testing only, when only one device - is used at the same time. It also shows some more informations + is used at the same time. It also shows some information about the hardware being detected. This module parameter can be changed at runtime thanks to the /sys filesystem interface. Default: 2 @@ -261,7 +261,7 @@ the fingerprint is: '88E8 F32F 7244 68BA 3958 5D40 99DA 5D2A FCE6 35A4'. 11. Credits =========== -- Informations about the chip internals needed to enable the I2C protocol have +- Information about the chip internals needed to enable the I2C protocol have been taken from the documentation of the ZC030x Video4Linux1 driver written by Andrew Birkett <andy@nobugs.org>; - The initialization values of the ZC0301 controller connected to the PAS202BCB diff --git a/Documentation/virtual/00-INDEX b/Documentation/virtual/00-INDEX new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fe0251c4cfb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/virtual/00-INDEX @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +Virtualization support in the Linux kernel. + +00-INDEX + - this file. +kvm/ + - Kernel Virtual Machine. See also http://linux-kvm.org +lguest/ + - Extremely simple hypervisor for experimental/educational use. +uml/ + - User Mode Linux, builds/runs Linux kernel as a userspace program. diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt index 9bef4e4cec50..9bef4e4cec50 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/api.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/cpuid.txt index 882068538c9c..882068538c9c 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/cpuid.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/cpuid.txt diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt index 3b4cd3bf5631..3b4cd3bf5631 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/locking.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/locking.txt diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/mmu.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt index 142cc5136650..f46aa58389ca 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/mmu.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/mmu.txt @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ The mmu code attempts to satisfy the following requirements: and framebuffer-based displays - footprint: keep the amount of pinned kernel memory low (most memory should be shrinkable) -- reliablity: avoid multipage or GFP_ATOMIC allocations +- reliability: avoid multipage or GFP_ATOMIC allocations Acronyms ======== diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/msr.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/msr.txt index d079aed27e03..d079aed27e03 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/msr.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/msr.txt diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/ppc-pv.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt index a7f2244b3be9..3ab969c59046 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/ppc-pv.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/ppc-pv.txt @@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ Patched instructions ==================== The "ld" and "std" instructions are transormed to "lwz" and "stw" instructions -respectively on 32 bit systems with an added offset of 4 to accomodate for big +respectively on 32 bit systems with an added offset of 4 to accommodate for big endianness. The following is a list of mapping the Linux kernel performs when running as diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/review-checklist.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/review-checklist.txt index 730475ae1b8d..a850986ed684 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/review-checklist.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/review-checklist.txt @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ Review checklist for kvm patches 2. Patches should be against kvm.git master branch. 3. If the patch introduces or modifies a new userspace API: - - the API must be documented in Documentation/kvm/api.txt + - the API must be documented in Documentation/virtual/kvm/api.txt - the API must be discoverable using KVM_CHECK_EXTENSION 4. New state must include support for save/restore. diff --git a/Documentation/kvm/timekeeping.txt b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/timekeeping.txt index 0c5033a58c9e..df8946377cb6 100644 --- a/Documentation/kvm/timekeeping.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/kvm/timekeeping.txt @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Mode 0: Single Timeout. This is a one-shot software timeout that counts down when the gate is high (always true for timers 0 and 1). When the count reaches zero, the output goes high. -Mode 1: Triggered One-shot. The output is intially set high. When the gate +Mode 1: Triggered One-shot. The output is initially set high. When the gate line is set high, a countdown is initiated (which does not stop if the gate is lowered), during which the output is set low. When the count reaches zero, the output goes high. diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/.gitignore b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/.gitignore index 115587fd5f65..115587fd5f65 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/.gitignore +++ b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/.gitignore diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/Makefile b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/Makefile index bebac6b4f332..bebac6b4f332 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/Makefile +++ b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/Makefile diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/extract b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/extract index 7730bb6e4b94..7730bb6e4b94 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/extract +++ b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/extract diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c index d9da7e148538..d9da7e148538 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.c +++ b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.c diff --git a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.txt b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.txt index dad99978a6a8..bff0c554485d 100644 --- a/Documentation/lguest/lguest.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest.txt @@ -74,7 +74,8 @@ Running Lguest: - Run an lguest as root: - Documentation/lguest/lguest 64 vmlinux --tunnet=192.168.19.1 --block=rootfile root=/dev/vda + Documentation/virtual/lguest/lguest 64 vmlinux --tunnet=192.168.19.1 \ + --block=rootfile root=/dev/vda Explanation: 64: the amount of memory to use, in MB. diff --git a/Documentation/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt index 9b7e1904db1c..9b7e1904db1c 100644 --- a/Documentation/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt +++ b/Documentation/virtual/uml/UserModeLinux-HOWTO.txt diff --git a/Documentation/vm/active_mm.txt b/Documentation/vm/active_mm.txt index 4ee1f643d897..dbf45817405f 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/active_mm.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/active_mm.txt @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ we have a user context", and is generally done by the page fault handler and things like that). Anyway, I put a pre-patch-2.3.13-1 on ftp.kernel.org just a moment ago, -because it slightly changes the interfaces to accomodate the alpha (who +because it slightly changes the interfaces to accommodate the alpha (who would have thought it, but the alpha actually ends up having one of the ugliest context switch codes - unlike the other architectures where the MM and register state is separate, the alpha PALcode joins the two, and you diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt index 457634c1e03e..f8551b3879f8 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt +++ b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ number of huge pages requested. This is the most reliable method of allocating huge pages as memory has not yet become fragmented. Some platforms support multiple huge page sizes. To allocate huge pages -of a specific size, one must preceed the huge pages boot command parameters +of a specific size, one must precede the huge pages boot command parameters with a huge page size selection parameter "hugepagesz=<size>". <size> must be specified in bytes with optional scale suffix [kKmMgG]. The default huge page size may be selected with the "default_hugepagesz=<size>" boot parameter. diff --git a/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting b/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting index 21c7b1f8f32b..706d7ed9d8d2 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting +++ b/Documentation/vm/overcommit-accounting @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ The Linux kernel supports the following overcommit handling modes address space are refused. Used for a typical system. It ensures a seriously wild allocation fails while allowing overcommit to reduce swap usage. root is allowed to - allocate slighly more memory in this mode. This is the + allocate slightly more memory in this mode. This is the default. 1 - Always overcommit. Appropriate for some scientific diff --git a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 index 90a65d23cf59..3f98b505a0ee 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 +++ b/Documentation/w1/slaves/w1_ds2423 @@ -21,8 +21,8 @@ value and associated ram buffer is outpputed to own line. Each lines will contain the values of 42 bytes read from the counter and memory page along the crc=YES or NO for indicating whether the read operation -was successfull and CRC matched. -If the operation was successfull, there is also in the end of each line +was successful and CRC matched. +If the operation was successful, there is also in the end of each line a counter value expressed as an integer after c= Meaning of 42 bytes represented is following: @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Meaning of 42 bytes represented is following: - crc=YES/NO indicating whether read was ok and crc matched - c=<int> current counter value -example from the successfull read: +example from the successful read: 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 6d 38 00 ff ff 00 00 fe ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=2 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 e0 1f 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=2 00 29 c6 5d 18 00 00 00 00 04 37 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff 00 00 ff ff crc=YES c=408798761 diff --git a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink index 804445f745ed..f59a31965d50 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink +++ b/Documentation/w1/w1.netlink @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ which will contain list of all registered master ids in the following format: cn_msg (CN_W1_IDX.CN_W1_VAL as id, len is equal to sizeof(struct - w1_netlink_msg) plus number of masters multipled by 4) + w1_netlink_msg) plus number of masters multiplied by 4) w1_netlink_msg (type: W1_LIST_MASTERS, len is equal to number of masters multiplied by 4 (u32 size)) id0 ... idN diff --git a/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt b/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt index 9c24d5ffbb06..9488078900e0 100644 --- a/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt +++ b/Documentation/watchdog/hpwdt.txt @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Last reviewed: 06/02/2009 The HP iLO2 NMI Watchdog driver is a kernel module that provides basic watchdog functionality and the added benefit of NMI sourcing. Both the watchdog functionality and the NMI sourcing capability need to be enabled - by the user. Remember that the two modes are not dependant on one another. + by the user. Remember that the two modes are not dependent on one another. A user can have the NMI sourcing without the watchdog timer and vice-versa. Watchdog functionality is enabled like any other common watchdog driver. That diff --git a/Documentation/workqueue.txt b/Documentation/workqueue.txt index 01c513fac40e..a0b577de918f 100644 --- a/Documentation/workqueue.txt +++ b/Documentation/workqueue.txt @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ CONTENTS 4. Application Programming Interface (API) 5. Example Execution Scenarios 6. Guidelines +7. Debugging 1. Introduction @@ -379,3 +380,42 @@ If q1 has WQ_CPU_INTENSIVE set, * Unless work items are expected to consume a huge amount of CPU cycles, using a bound wq is usually beneficial due to the increased level of locality in wq operations and work item execution. + + +7. Debugging + +Because the work functions are executed by generic worker threads +there are a few tricks needed to shed some light on misbehaving +workqueue users. + +Worker threads show up in the process list as: + +root 5671 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S 12:07 0:00 [kworker/0:1] +root 5672 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S 12:07 0:00 [kworker/1:2] +root 5673 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S 12:12 0:00 [kworker/0:0] +root 5674 0.0 0.0 0 0 ? S 12:13 0:00 [kworker/1:0] + +If kworkers are going crazy (using too much cpu), there are two types +of possible problems: + + 1. Something beeing scheduled in rapid succession + 2. A single work item that consumes lots of cpu cycles + +The first one can be tracked using tracing: + + $ echo workqueue:workqueue_queue_work > /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace_pipe > out.txt + (wait a few secs) + ^C + +If something is busy looping on work queueing, it would be dominating +the output and the offender can be determined with the work item +function. + +For the second type of problems it should be possible to just check +the stack trace of the offending worker thread. + + $ cat /proc/THE_OFFENDING_KWORKER/stack + +The work item's function should be trivially visible in the stack +trace. diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt index 092e596a1301..c54b4f503e2a 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/boot-options.txt @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ IOMMU (input/output memory management unit) (e.g. because you have < 3 GB memory). Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: Disabling IOMMU" - 2. <arch/x86_64/kernel/pci-gart.c>: AMD GART based hardware IOMMU. + 2. <arch/x86/kernel/amd_gart_64.c>: AMD GART based hardware IOMMU. Kernel boot message: "PCI-DMA: using GART IOMMU" 3. <arch/x86_64/kernel/pci-swiotlb.c> : Software IOMMU implementation. Used diff --git a/Documentation/zh_CN/email-clients.txt b/Documentation/zh_CN/email-clients.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5d65e323d060 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/zh_CN/email-clients.txt @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ +锘?Chinese translated version of Documentation/email-clients.txt + +If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the +original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem +communicating in English you can also ask the Chinese maintainer for +help. Contact the Chinese maintainer if this translation is outdated +or if there is a problem with the translation. + +Chinese maintainer: Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +--------------------------------------------------------------------- +Documentation/email-clients.txt ???涓????缈昏?? + +濡??????宠??璁烘????存?版???????????瀹癸??璇风?存?ヨ??绯诲?????妗ｇ??缁存?よ?????濡????浣?浣跨?ㄨ?辨?? +浜ゆ???????伴?剧??璇?锛?涔????浠ュ??涓???????缁存?よ??姹???┿??濡???????缈昏????存?颁???????舵?????缈? +璇?瀛???ㄩ??棰?锛?璇疯??绯讳腑??????缁存?よ????? + +涓???????缁存?よ??锛? 璐惧??濞? Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +涓???????缈昏?????锛? 璐惧??濞? Harry Wei <harryxiyou@gmail.com> +涓?????????¤?????锛? Yinglin Luan <synmyth@gmail.com> + Xiaochen Wang <wangxiaochen0@gmail.com> + yaxinsn <yaxinsn@163.com> + +浠ヤ??涓烘?ｆ?? +--------------------------------------------------------------------- + +Linux???浠跺?㈡?风?????缃?淇℃?? +====================================================================== + +?????????缃? +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +Linux?????歌ˉ涓???????杩????浠惰?????浜ょ??锛????濂芥??琛ヤ??浣?涓洪??浠朵????????宓?????????????浜?缁存?よ?? +??ユ?堕??浠讹??浣???????浠剁?????瀹规?煎??搴?璇ユ??"text/plain"?????惰??锛????浠朵????????涓?璧???????锛? +???涓鸿??浼?浣胯ˉ涓????寮???ㄩ?ㄥ????ㄨ??璁鸿??绋?涓???????寰???伴?俱?? + +??ㄦ?ュ?????Linux?????歌ˉ涓???????浠跺?㈡?风????ㄥ?????琛ヤ????跺??璇ュ??浜?????????????濮???舵?????渚?濡?锛? +浠?浠?涓???芥?瑰?????????????ゅ?惰〃绗???????绌烘?硷???????虫????ㄦ??涓?琛????寮?澶存?????缁?灏俱?? + +涓?瑕????杩?"format=flowed"妯″????????琛ヤ?????杩???蜂??寮?璧蜂?????棰????浠ュ?????瀹崇?????琛???? + +涓?瑕?璁╀????????浠跺?㈡?风??杩?琛??????ㄦ?㈣?????杩???蜂??浼???村??浣????琛ヤ????? + +???浠跺?㈡?风??涓???芥?瑰???????????瀛?绗????缂??????瑰?????瑕??????????琛ヤ???????芥??ASCII??????UTF-8缂??????瑰??锛? +濡????浣?浣跨??UTF-8缂??????瑰???????????浠讹????ｄ??浣?灏?浼???垮??涓?浜??????藉????????瀛?绗???????棰???? + +???浠跺?㈡?风??搴?璇ュ舰???骞朵??淇???? References: ?????? In-Reply-To: ???棰?锛???ｄ?? +???浠惰??棰?灏变??浼?涓??????? + +澶???剁??甯?(?????????璐寸??甯?)???甯镐????界?ㄤ??琛ヤ??锛????涓哄?惰〃绗?浼?杞????涓虹┖??笺??浣跨??xclipboard, xclip +??????xcutsel涔?璁稿??浠ワ??浣???????濂芥??璇?涓?涓?????????垮??浣跨?ㄥ????剁??甯???? + +涓?瑕???ㄤ娇???PGP/GPG缃插????????浠朵腑??????琛ヤ?????杩???蜂??浣垮??寰?澶???????涓???借?诲??????????ㄤ??浣????琛ヤ????? +锛?杩?涓????棰?搴?璇ユ?????浠ヤ慨澶????锛? + +??ㄧ???????搁??浠跺??琛ㄥ?????琛ヤ??涔????锛?缁????宸卞?????涓?涓?琛ヤ?????涓?涓???????涓绘??锛?淇?瀛???ユ?跺?扮?? +???浠讹??灏?琛ヤ?????'patch'??戒护???涓?锛?濡??????????浜?锛????缁??????搁??浠跺??琛ㄥ???????? + + +涓?浜????浠跺?㈡?风?????绀? +---------------------------------------------------------------------- +杩????缁???轰??浜?璇?缁????MUA???缃????绀猴?????浠ョ?ㄤ??缁?Linux?????稿?????琛ヤ?????杩?浜?骞朵???????虫?? +?????????杞?浠跺?????缃???荤????? + +璇存??锛? +TUI = 浠ユ?????涓哄?虹???????ㄦ?锋?ュ?? +GUI = ??惧舰?????㈢?ㄦ?锋?ュ?? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Alpine (TUI) + +???缃????椤癸?? +???"Sending Preferences"??ㄥ??锛? + +- "Do Not Send Flowed Text"蹇?椤诲????? +- "Strip Whitespace Before Sending"蹇?椤诲?抽?? + +褰???????浠舵?讹????????搴?璇ユ?惧?ㄨˉ涓?浼???虹?扮????版?癸????跺?????涓?CTRL-R缁???????锛?浣挎??瀹???? +琛ヤ?????浠跺????ュ?伴??浠朵腑??? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Evolution (GUI) + +涓?浜?寮????????????????浣跨?ㄥ????????琛ヤ?? + +褰??????╅??浠堕??椤癸??Preformat + 浠?Format->Heading->Preformatted (Ctrl-7)??????宸ュ?锋?? + +??跺??浣跨??锛? + Insert->Text File... (Alt-n x)?????ヨˉ涓????浠躲?? + +浣?杩????浠?"diff -Nru old.c new.c | xclip"锛???????Preformat锛???跺??浣跨?ㄤ腑??撮??杩?琛?绮?甯???? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Kmail (GUI) + +涓?浜?寮????????????????浣跨?ㄥ????????琛ヤ????? + +榛?璁よ?剧疆涓?涓?HTML??煎??????????????锛?涓?瑕??????ㄥ????? + +褰?涔????涓?灏????浠剁????跺??锛???ㄩ??椤逛?????涓?瑕??????╄????ㄦ?㈣????????涓????缂虹?瑰氨???浣???ㄩ??浠朵腑杈???ョ??浠讳???????? +??戒??浼?琚??????ㄦ?㈣??锛????姝や??蹇?椤诲?ㄥ?????琛ヤ??涔?????????ㄦ?㈣????????绠?????????规??灏辨???????ㄨ????ㄦ?㈣????ヤ功??????浠讹?? +??跺?????瀹?淇?瀛?涓鸿??绋裤??涓????浣???ㄨ??绋夸腑???娆℃??寮?瀹?锛?瀹?宸茬????ㄩ?ㄨ????ㄦ?㈣??浜?锛???ｄ??浣???????浠惰?界?舵病??? +?????╄????ㄦ?㈣??锛?浣????杩?涓?浼?澶卞?诲凡???????????ㄦ?㈣????? + +??ㄩ??浠剁??搴????锛??????ヨˉ涓?涔????锛???句??甯哥?ㄧ??琛ヤ??瀹????绗?锛?涓?涓?杩?瀛????(---)??? + +??跺?????"Message"????????＄??锛??????╂????ユ??浠讹????ョ????????浣????琛ヤ?????浠躲??杩????涓?涓?棰?澶???????椤癸??浣????浠? +???杩?瀹????缃?浣???????浠跺缓绔?宸ュ?锋????????锛?杩????浠ュ甫涓?"insert file"??炬????? + +浣????浠ュ????ㄥ?伴??杩?GPG???璁伴??浠讹??浣???????宓?琛ヤ?????濂戒??瑕?浣跨??GPG???璁板??浠????浣?涓哄??宓??????????绛惧??琛ヤ??锛? +褰?浠?GPG涓???????7浣?缂??????朵??浣夸??浠?????????村??澶??????? + +濡????浣????瑕?浠ラ??浠剁??褰㈠????????琛ヤ??锛???ｄ??灏卞?抽????瑰?婚??浠讹????跺?????涓?灞???э??绐????"Suggest automatic +display"锛?杩???峰??宓????浠舵?村?规??璁╄?昏???????般?? + +褰?浣?瑕?淇?瀛?灏?瑕?????????????宓???????琛ヤ??锛?浣????浠ヤ??娑???????琛ㄧ????奸????╁?????琛ヤ????????浠讹????跺????冲?婚????? +"save as"???浣????浠ヤ娇??ㄤ??涓?娌℃????存?圭????????琛ヤ????????浠讹??濡????瀹????浠ユ?ｇ‘???褰㈠??缁???????褰?浣?姝ｇ????ㄥ?? +???宸辩??绐???ｄ??涓?瀵????锛???ｆ?舵病??????椤瑰??浠ヤ??瀛????浠?--宸茬?????涓?涓?杩???风??bug琚?姹???ュ?颁??kmail???bugzilla +骞朵??甯????杩?灏?浼?琚?澶??????????浠舵??浠ュ?????瀵规??涓???ㄦ?峰??璇诲???????????琚?淇?瀛????锛????浠ュ?????浣???虫?????浠跺????跺?板?朵????版?癸?? +浣?涓?寰?涓????浠?浠????????????逛负缁?????????翠?????璇汇?? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Lotus Notes (GUI) + +涓?瑕?浣跨?ㄥ????? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Mutt (TUI) + +寰?澶?Linux寮????浜哄??浣跨??mutt瀹㈡?风??锛????浠ヨ?????瀹????瀹?宸ヤ????????甯告??浜???? + +Mutt涓????甯?缂?杈????锛????浠ヤ??绠′??浣跨?ㄤ??涔?缂?杈???ㄩ?戒??搴?璇ュ甫????????ㄦ??琛????澶у????扮??杈???ㄩ?藉甫??? +涓?涓?"insert file"???椤癸??瀹????浠ラ??杩?涓???瑰?????浠跺??瀹圭????瑰???????ユ??浠躲?? + +'vim'浣?涓?mutt???缂?杈????锛? + set editor="vi" + + 濡????浣跨??xclip锛???插?ヤ互涓???戒护 + :set paste + ???涓????涔??????????shift-insert??????浣跨?? + :r filename + +濡??????宠?????琛ヤ??浣?涓哄??宓?????????? +(a)ttach宸ヤ?????寰?濂斤??涓?甯????"set paste"??? + +???缃????椤癸?? +瀹?搴?璇ヤ互榛?璁よ?剧疆???褰㈠??宸ヤ????? +??惰??锛????"send_charset"璁剧疆涓?"us-ascii::utf-8"涔????涓?涓?涓???????涓绘????? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Pine (TUI) + +Pine杩???绘??涓?浜?绌烘?煎????????棰?锛?浣????杩?浜???板?ㄥ??璇ラ?借??淇?澶?浜???? + +濡???????浠ワ??璇蜂娇???alpine(pine???缁ф?胯??) + +???缃????椤癸?? +- ???杩?????????????瑕?娑???ゆ??绋??????? +- "no-strip-whitespace-before-send"???椤逛????????瑕??????? + + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Sylpheed (GUI) + +- ???宓??????????浠ュ??濂界??宸ヤ??锛???????浣跨?ㄩ??浠讹????? +- ???璁镐娇??ㄥ????ㄧ??缂?杈???ㄣ?? +- 瀵逛?????褰?杈?澶???堕??甯告????? +- 濡???????杩?non-SSL杩???ワ?????娉?浣跨??TLS SMTP????????? +- ??ㄧ?????绐???ｄ腑???涓?涓?寰??????ㄧ??ruler bar??? +- 缁???板?????涓?娣诲????板??灏变??浼?姝ｇ‘???浜?瑙ｆ?剧ず?????? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Thunderbird (GUI) + +榛?璁ゆ????典??锛?thunderbird寰?瀹规??????????????锛?浣????杩????涓?浜???规?????浠ュ己??跺?????寰???村ソ??? + +- ??ㄧ?ㄦ?峰????疯?剧疆???锛?缁???????瀵诲??锛?涓?瑕???????"Compose messages in HTML format"??? + +- 缂?杈?浣????Thunderbird???缃?璁剧疆??ヤ娇瀹?涓?瑕????琛?浣跨??锛?user_pref("mailnews.wraplength", 0); + +- 缂?杈?浣????Thunderbird???缃?璁剧疆锛?浣垮??涓?瑕?浣跨??"format=flowed"??煎??锛?user_pref("mailnews. + send_plaintext_flowed", false); + +- 浣????瑕?浣?Thunderbird???涓洪???????煎????瑰??锛? + 濡????榛?璁ゆ????典??浣?涔??????????HTML??煎??锛???ｄ?????寰???俱??浠?浠?浠????棰???????涓????妗?涓???????"Preformat"??煎????? + 濡????榛?璁ゆ????典??浣?涔??????????????????煎??锛?浣?涓?寰????瀹???逛负HTML??煎??锛?浠?浠?浣?涓轰??娆℃?х??锛???ヤ功?????扮??娑????锛? + ??跺??寮哄?朵娇瀹??????版???????煎??锛???????瀹?灏变?????琛????瑕?瀹???板??锛???ㄥ??淇＄????炬??涓?浣跨??shift?????ヤ娇瀹????涓?HTML + ??煎??锛???跺?????棰???????涓????妗?涓???????"Preformat"??煎????? + +- ???璁镐娇??ㄥ????ㄧ??缂?杈????锛? + ???瀵?Thunderbird???琛ヤ?????绠?????????规??灏辨??浣跨?ㄤ??涓?"external editor"??╁??锛???跺??浣跨?ㄤ????????娆㈢?? + $EDITOR??ヨ?诲???????????骞惰ˉ涓???版?????涓????瑕?瀹???板??锛????浠ヤ??杞藉苟涓?瀹?瑁?杩?涓???╁??锛???跺??娣诲??涓?涓?浣跨?ㄥ????? + ??????View->Toolbars->Customize...??????褰?浣?涔????淇℃???????跺??浠?浠???瑰?诲??灏卞??浠ヤ????? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +TkRat (GUI) + +???浠ヤ娇??ㄥ?????浣跨??"Insert file..."??????澶???ㄧ??缂?杈???ㄣ?? + +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ +Gmail (Web GUI) + +涓?瑕?浣跨?ㄥ????????琛ヤ????? + +Gmail缃?椤靛?㈡?风???????ㄥ?版????惰〃绗?杞????涓虹┖??笺?? + +??界?跺?惰〃绗?杞????涓虹┖??奸??棰????浠ヨ??澶???ㄧ??杈???ㄨВ??筹???????跺??杩?浼?浣跨?ㄥ??杞???㈣?????姣?琛???????涓?78涓?瀛?绗???? + +???涓?涓????棰????Gmail杩?浼????浠讳??涓????ASCII???瀛?绗????淇℃????逛负base64缂???????瀹????涓?瑗垮????????娆ф床浜虹?????瀛???? + + ### |